9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.

1 Operation and Maintenence
TWT63013-R 1.2.1-SG1-SEN- I1.0 Issue 1.00

STUDENT GUIDE

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 1

Empty page
Switch to notes view!

2
9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 2

Terms of Use and Legal Notices
1. Safety Warning Switch to notes view!

Both lethal and dangerous voltages may be present within the products used herein. The user is strongly advised not to wear conductive jewelry while working on the products. Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the equipment alone. The equipment used during this course may be electrostatic sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static precautions.

2. Trade Marks
Alcatel-Lucent and MainStreet are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks, service marks and logos (“Marks”) are the property of their respective holders, including Alcatel-Lucent. Users are not permitted to use these Marks without the prior consent of Alcatel-Lucent or such third party owning the Mark. The absence of a Mark identifier is not a representation that a particular product or service name is not a Mark. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented herein, which may be subject to change without notice.

3. Copyright
This document contains information that is proprietary to Alcatel-Lucent and may be used for training purposes only. No other use or transmission of all or any part of this document is permitted without Alcatel-Lucent’s written permission, and must include all copyright and other proprietary notices. No other use or transmission of all or any part of its contents may be used, copied, disclosed or conveyed to any party in any manner whatsoever without prior written permission from Alcatel-Lucent. Use or transmission of all or any part of this document in violation of any applicable legislation is hereby expressly prohibited. User obtains no rights in the information or in any product, process, technology or trademark which it includes or describes, and is expressly prohibited from modifying the information or creating derivative works without the express written consent of Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3
9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

4. Disclaimer
In no event will Alcatel-Lucent be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, including lost profits, lost business or lost data, resulting from the use of or reliance upon the information, whether or not Alcatel-Lucent has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Mention of non-Alcatel-Lucent products or services is for information purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement, nor a recommendation. This course is intended to train the student about the overall look, feel, and use of Alcatel-Lucent products. The information contained herein is representational only. In the interest of file size, simplicity, and compatibility and, in some cases, due to contractual limitations, certain compromises have been made and therefore some features are not entirely accurate. Please refer to technical practices supplied by Alcatel-Lucent for current information concerning Alcatel-Lucent equipment and its operation, or contact your nearest Alcatel-Lucent representative for more information. The Alcatel-Lucent products described or used herein are presented for demonstration and training purposes only. AlcatelLucent disclaims any warranties in connection with the products as used and described in the courses or the related documentation, whether express, implied, or statutory. Alcatel-Lucent specifically disclaims all implied warranties, including warranties of merchantability, non-infringement and fitness for a particular purpose, or arising from a course of dealing, usage or trade practice. Alcatel-Lucent is not responsible for any failures caused by: server errors, misdirected or redirected transmissions, failed internet connections, interruptions, any computer virus or any other technical defect, whether human or technical in nature

5. Governing Law
The products, documentation and information contained herein, as well as these Terms of Use and Legal Notices are governed by the laws of France, excluding its conflict of law rules. If any provision of these Terms of Use and Legal Notices, or the application thereof to any person or circumstances, is held invalid for any reason, unenforceable including, but not limited to, the warranty disclaimers and liability limitations, then such provision shall be deemed superseded by a valid, enforceable provision that matches, as closely as possible, the original provision, and the other provisions of these Terms of Use and Legal Notices shall remain in full force and effect.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 3

Blank Page
Switch to notes view!

4
9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 4

Course Outline
Section 1. Product About This Course Overview
Course Module 1. Introduction outline Technical support Module 2. Architecture Course Module 3. Management System objectives

4. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 5. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 6. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

1. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

Section 2. Functional Description

Xxx Module 2. ODU HW Hardware Architecture Topic/Section is Positioned Here Xxx 7. Xxx Section 3. NE operation

Module 1. MSS HW Hardware Architecture

Module 1. Operator interface

2. Topic/Section 2. Initial configuration Module is Positioned Here 3. Section 4. Maintenance Topic/Section is Positioned Here
Module 1. Fault management Module 2. Software download Module 3. Performance monitoring

5
9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 5

Course Outline [cont.]
Switch to notes view!

6
9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights This page is Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 6

Course Objectives
Switch to notes view!
Welcome to 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to: Configure and manage the 9500MPR

7
9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 7

Course Objectives [cont.]
Switch to notes view!

8
9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 8

About this Student Guide
Conventions used in this guide Switch to notes view!
Note
Provides you with additional information about the topic being discussed. Although this information is not required knowledge, you might find it useful or interesting.

Technical Reference
(1) 24.348.98 – Points you to the exact section of Alcatel-Lucent Technical Practices where you can find more information on the topic being discussed.

Warning
Alerts you to instances where non-compliance could result in equipment damage or personal injury.

9

9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

Where you can get further information

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

If you want further information you can refer to the following: Technical Practices for the specific product Technical support page on the Alcatel website: http://www.alcatel-lucent.com

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 9

About this Student Guide [cont.]
Switch to notes view!

10
9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 10

Self-assessment of Objectives
Contract number : Course title : Language :

Client (Company, Center) : Number of trainees :

At the end of each section you will be asked to fill this questionnaire Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training Switch to notes view!
Dates from : Location : to :

Surname, First name : Did you meet the following objectives ? Tick the corresponding box Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training
Yes (or globally yes) No (or globally no)

Instructional objectives 1 • 2 To be able to: Describe the basic concepts of 9500MPR

Comments

To be able to: • Describe the main functionalities All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 11 of the 9500MPR 9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence 3 To be able to: • Describe the management system of the 9500MPR 4 To be able to : • Describe the functionality of each unit of the MSS 5 • 6 To be able to: Describe the functionality of the ODUs To be able to: understand all the menus available with the LCT


7 • 8 • 9 •

To be able to: Configure a NE starting from scratch To be able to: Activate and evaluate the performance monitoring application To be able to: Performa the troubleshooting of the 9500MPR

10 To be able to: • Perform the SW download of the 9500MPR

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence - Page 11

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Other comments Thank you for your answers to this questionnaire All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500MPR R 1.Self-assessment of Objectives [cont.] Switch to notes view! Instructional objectives Yes (or Globally yes) No (or globally no) Comments 12 9500 MPR 9500MPR R 1.Page 12 .2.2.1 Operation and Maintenence .

Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 1 Product Overview Module 1 Introduction 3JK Edition 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 1 .00 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2007-07-30 Author External Consultant Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © 2007.Blank Page 1·1·2 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 2 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

1·1·3 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 3 .Objectives Objectives: to be able to describe the basic concepts of the 9500 MPR. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

2.] 1·1·4 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 4 .Objectives [cont.

2 9500 MPR Node Blank Page 3 Radio configuration 3.6 Service-driven Packet Adaptive Modulation Blank Page 2 System description 2.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 5 .Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations 1.4 Service Awareness 1.1 System description 2.1 Radio configuration 4 System configuration 4.1 Classification of the new generation products 1.3 Multiservice Aggregation Layer 1.5 Packet Node 1.2 Presentation 1.1 Example of System configurations Blank Page End of Module Page 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 19 20 23 28 29 30 31 32 37 38 1·1·5 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

] Switch to notes view! 1·1·6 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All This Rights Reservedleft blank intentionally page is © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 6 .2.Table of Contents [cont.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 7 .1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations 1·1·7 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 8 .2.1 Classification of the new generation products Alcatel-Lucent microwave product acronyms are derived as follows: 9 5 0 0 MPR R = Radio Means radio product 5 for Radio Cross-Connect P = Packet M = Microwave 1·1·8 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. type of service requirements and type of interface Service-driven adaptive modulation: fully exploit the air bandwidth in its entirety by changing modulation scheme according to the propagation availability and allocate transport capacity. in term of: capacity. independently by the type of interface.2. Ethernet becomes the convergence layer.1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations 1. queuing traffic according to the type of service assigned. only possible in a packet-based environment 1·1·9 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. discriminating traffic by different services.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 Presentation The 9500 MPR innovative solutions mainly are: Multiservice aggregation layer: the capacity to use Ethernet as a common transmission layer to transport any kind of traffic.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 9 . independently by the type of interface Packet node: no service aggregation limits with all traffic aggregated in packets. Service awareness: traffic handling and quality management.

3 Multiservice Aggregation Layer Access network Any TDM/Ethernet interfaces nxE1 2G ISAM. All Rights Reserved © 2007. regardless of the nature of carried traffic. Mapping different access technologies over Ethernet is achieved by standardized protocols like circuit emulation and pseudo-wire.2. This allows sharing of common packet transmission infrastructures. Due to the nature of Ethernet. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. WiMAX Ethernet 3G HSDPA Voice on R99 nxE1 GSM Packet Backhaul network Ethernet aggregation layer 9500 MPR Aggregated traffic over Ethernet Single technology throughout the network: Ethernet as convergence layer 1 · 1 · 10 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500 MPR aggregates and carries over a COMMON PACKET LAYER: TDM 2G.1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 10 . 3G and IP/Ethernet. each service can be discriminated based on several parameters like quality of service.

All Rights Reserved © 2007.] 1 · 1 · 11 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. ATM and IP/Eth is carried over a common layer and therefore over one single physical interface.1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Multiservice aggregation layer means the capacity to use Ethernet as common transmission layer to transport any kind of traffic.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 11 . E1. Ethernet becomes the convergence layer. Due to the nature of Ethernet we can then discriminate each service based over several parameters like quality of service. Mapping over Ethernet of these different technologies is achieved by standardized protocols like circuitemulation and pseudo-wire. This allows sharing a common packet transmission infrastructure. The use of standard protocol is a key factor that allows operators to recover their original traffic at any point in the network from any equipment compliant to the standards.3 Multiservice Aggregation Layer [cont. regardless of the nature of carried traffic.

and in case of the non real time variable bit rate one. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Guaranteed bit rate Low Priority Queue.4 Service Awareness SERVICE CLASSIFICATION: Voice. Video Telephony High Priority Queue.2. ATM and/or IP/Eth.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Service awareness means the ability to discriminate the different traffic types carried over the converged Ethernet stream. obtaining dramatic band reduction SERVICE QUALITY MANAGEMENT: Service scheduler queuing packets according to the quality of service assigned. VideoD & Gaming SERVICE AGGREGATION and OVERBOOKING: Service aggregation using statistical multiplexing. For instance ATM traffic from a 3G base stations can carry voice (high priority. coming from different sources. music download or video streaming). and therefore having different requirements. LOW for Broadband Decoupling access technology from transport technology: manage services 1 · 1 · 12 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Ethernet) PACKETIZATION PROCESSING: TDM Standard CEoEth [MEF8] Ethernet Native Constant bit rate services Revenue based on real-time communication Voice. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. real time service) and data (lower priority and possibly non real time with high variability load. optimize the band with overbooking of the radio scarce resource.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 12 .1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations 1. Service awareness is what allows identifying the traffic types. HIGH for real-time traffic. Broadband INPUTS : Any interfaces (E1. Our traffic flow can be composed by E1s. such as internet browsing. Remaining bit rate Variable bit rate services Revenue based on access to contents HiSpeed @.

] 1 · 1 · 13 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 13 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4 Service Awareness [cont.

2.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 14 .1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 9500 MPR offers a SINGLE PACKET MATRIX able to switch.5 Packet Node Address new data services in the best way: packet natively 1 · 1 · 14 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. aggregate and handle any of the possible incoming traffic types with virtually no capacity limits (up to 10 GBps).

1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations

1.5 Packet Node [cont.]

1 · 1 · 15
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Packet Node permits to handle all the traffic over a common layer (Multiservice Aggregation Layer), allowing overbooking across different technologies: the same services generated by an ATM source and an IP source can share the same bandwidth resource.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 15

1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations

1.6 Service-driven Packet Adaptive Modulation

Modulation schemes Capacity

16 QAM 4 QAM

99.9 99.99 99.999
Time line Outage Capacity Customer Satisfaction

9500 MPR

unavailability

14 MHz 16 Mb/s in 4 QAM at 99.999% availability 14 MHz 48 Mb/s in 64 QAM at 99.9% availability Voice Traffic Best Effort Traffic

Maintain the same level of quality for voice services as in the TDM network

1 · 1 · 16
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

9500 MPR allows to fully exploit the air bandwidth in its entirety by changing modulation scheme according to the propagation availability, associating to the different services quality the available transport capacity.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 16

Satisfaction

64 QAM

1 Understanding the 9500MPR innovations

1.6 Service-driven Packet Adaptive Modulation [cont.]

Microwave TDM Adaptive modulation adds or removes capacity from physical interfaces Complex physical interfaces networking operation is required to ensure that only low priority traffic is dropped

Microwave Packet Adaptive modulation adds or removes capacity from best effort services, regardless of physical interface Interface decoupling from service classification removes any additional networking operations, low priority service is always dropped, regardless of what the interface is

Fading

Packets traffic over TDM Total Band

Fading

Native Packet traffic Total Band

1 · 1 · 17
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 17

Blank Page

1 · 1 · 18
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 18

2 System description

1 · 1 · 19
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 19

2 System description

2.1 System description
9500 MPR radio system family supports, in a common platform, PDH E1 and packet data (Ethernet) applications. Outdoor transceivers are available in the frequency range from 6 GHz up to 38 GHz. For the Outdoor transceiver, 1+0 is the optimized configuration, with branching systems outside the ODU. 1+1 configuration is obtained with external dedicated mechanical arrangement.

1 · 1 · 20
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 20

2 System description

2.1 System description [cont.]

1 · 1 · 21
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

9500 MPR in the split mount architecture is built by two separate units: MSS (Microwave Service Switch): indoor unit for split mount and stand alone configurations (Ethernet uplink) ODU300 microwave uplink for split mount configurations

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 21

2 System description

2.1 System description [cont.]
MSS implements functionalities of grooming, routing, switching and protection, exploiting a packet oriented technology. The Core-E platform, with symmetrical x-connection functions, manages different radio directions, with the possibility to add-drop tributaries in case of local PDH/Ethernet accesses. Core-E platform is based on packet technology (Ethernet Switch) with a generic interface serial GbEth between Core-E and peripherals The peripherals are independent modules connecting the Core-E to a set of different external interfaces, through a high speed serial bus. The available peripherals are:
32 x E1 local access modules Radio Access modules (modem card)

The PDH incoming traffic is converted into Ethernet packets and then sent to the Ethernet switch; the packet overhead is optimized before to be sent in the air.

1 · 1 · 22
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 22

2 System description

2.2 9500 MPR Node

1 · 1 · 23
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

The 9500 MPR Node supports up to 6 RF links for operation on the same or different frequency bands using the MSS-8 Unit. The ODU for each link is connected to plug-in Radio Access card inside the site aggregator. Other plug-in cards provide line interface access (TDM and native IP), management, and so on. 9500 MPR Node supports a mix of non-protected and protected or diversity operation for single link, repeater or star radio configurations.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 23

2 System description

2.2 9500 MPR Node [cont.]
MSS-8 Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 5 Slot 7 Slot 2 Slot 9 Slot 4 Slot 6 Slot 8

Slot 1 reserved for Core-E Main Slot 2 reserved for Core-E Spare Slot 3 to 8 Universal (any Tributary and Radio card) Slot 9 reserved for FANS

The cards belonging to a protected configuration must be installed on the same row (the Main card is on the left side, the Spare card is on the right side)
Supports 6 Unprotected links or 1 Protected and 4 Unprotected links or 2 Protected and 2 Unprotected links or 3 Protected links

1 · 1 · 24
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

The figure illustrates platform functions/capabilities.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 24

2 System description

2.2 9500 MPR Node [cont.]

MSS-4 Slot 5 Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 4

Slot 1 reserved for Core-E Main Slot 2 reserved for Core-E Spare Slot 3 and 4 Universal (any Tributary and Radio card) Slot 5 reserved for FANS

In case of protected configuration the Main card is on the left side, the Spare card is on the right side.
Supports 2 Unprotected links or 1 Protected link

1 · 1 · 25
Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

The figure illustrates platform functions/capabilities.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 25

56 Mbit/s 156.88 Mbit/s 21.] Radio capacity.1 Operation and Maintenence Net radio throughput 10.76 Mbit/s 43.76 Mbit/s 32.52 Mbit/s 65.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 26 .60 Mbit/s 313.28 Mbit/s 43.52 Mbit/s 87.04 Mbit/s 111.2 System description 2.64 Mbit/s 21. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.80 Mbit/s 177.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. channelling scheme and modulation (Static Modulation).2 9500 MPR Node [cont.60 Mbit/s All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 E1 Equivalent Capacity (TDM2TDM) 4 E1 8 E1 13 E1 8 E1 18 E1 27 E1 18 E1 37 E1 48 E1 56 E1 68 E1 77 E1 136 E1 128 QAM The table summaries the relations among Radio capacity. channelling scheme and modulation (Static Modulation) Channel Spacing Modulation 4 QAM 7 MHz 16 QAM 64 QAM 4 QAM 14 MHz 16 QAM 64 QAM 4 QAM 16 QAM 32 QAM 28 MHz 64 QAM 128 QAM 256 QAM 56 MHz 1 · 1 · 26 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.36 Mbit/s 130.

04 Mbit/s 130.2 9500 MPR Node [cont.76 Mbit/s 32. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 27 .76 Mbit/s 43. channelling scheme and modulation (Adaptive Modulation) Channelling Spacing 28 MHz Modulation 4 QAM 16 QAM 64 QAM 4 QAM 14 MHz 16 QAM 64 QAM 4 QAM 7 MHz 16 QAM 64 QAM Net radio throughput 43.88 Mbit/s 21.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.64 Mbit/s Equivalent capacity E1 (Note) 18 E1 37 E1 56 E1 8 E1 18 E1 27 E1 4 E1 8 E1 13 E1 1 · 1 · 27 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.56 Mbit/s 21.] Radio capacity.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: the total capacity associated to the TDM2TDM and TDM2Eth profiles is always the capacity relevant to the lowest modulation scheme (4 QAM if the Adaptive Modulation is in the 4/16/64 QAM range and 4 QAM if the Adaptive Modulation is in the 4/16 QAM range).28 Mbit/s 10.52 Mbit/s 65.52 Mbit/s 87.2 System description 2.

00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 28 .Blank Page 1 · 1 · 28 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.

2.3 Radio configuration 1 · 1 · 29 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 29 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

5/6.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 30 .2.1 Radio configuration 1+0 unprotected 1+1 Hot-Standby (HS) (2 coupler types: balanced 3dB and unbalanced 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.0dB) 1+1 Hot-Standby Space Diversity (HSSD) (no combiner) 1+1/2x(1+0) Frequency Diversity (FD) (co-polar) 1+1/2x(1+0) Frequency Diversity (FD) (hetero-polar) 1 · 1 · 30 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3 Radio configuration 3.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 System configuration 1 · 1 · 31 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 31 .2.

2.Mapping of 32 E1 on Ethernet 1 · 1 · 32 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4 System configuration 4.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 32 .1 Example of System configurations TDM Over Ethernet Packet Node .

32 E1 Access.] TDM and Ethernet Terminal Packet Transport .1 Example of System configurations [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.4 System configuration 4. 1 Radio Direction 1 · 1 · 33 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 33 .

2. 2 unprotected links 1 · 1 · 34 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 System configuration 4. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] TDM and Ethernet Add/Drop N1 Packet Node .1 Example of System configurations [cont.Ethernet and 32 E1 Local Access.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 34 .

1 Example of System configurations [cont. 1 protected link 1 · 1 · 35 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 35 .2.4 System configuration 4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] TDM and Ethernet Terminal Packet Node-Ethernet and 32 E1 Local Access.

1 unprotected link. 1 protected link 1 · 1 · 36 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.] TDM and Ethernet Add/Drop Packet Node-Ethernet and 32 E1 Local Access. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4 System configuration 4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Example of System configurations [cont.2.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 36 .

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 37 .2.Blank Page 1 · 1 · 37 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 38 .2.End of Module Introduction 1 · 1 · 38 Product Overview · Introduction 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 1 Product Overview Module 2 Architecture 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 1 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Blank Page 1·2·2 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 2 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2007-07-30 Author External Consultant Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

1·2·3 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Objectives Objectives: to be able to describe the main functionalities of the 9500 MPR.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 3 .

] 1·2·4 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.Objectives [cont.2.1 Operation and Maintenence This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 4 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

1 Quality Of Services (QoS) 3.6.2 PDH Terminal with PDH local accesses 1.4 Synchronisation Interface · 9500MPR R 1.3 TDM2Eth 2.1 MSS Architecture 1.2 Differential clock recovery All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 · 2 · 54.3 RPS Switching Criteria 6.6.4 EPS Switching Criteria 6.5 HSB Switching Criteria End of Module Page 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 19 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 49 50 51 52 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 Core-E QoS 3.3 Core-E scheduler 3.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 MSS Architecture 1.1 Synchronisation 4.2 Reserved Multicast Addresses 4 Synchronisation 4.5 Modem unit scheduler 3.2 E1 Cross-connection 5.1 Traffic profiles 2.1 Cross-connection 5.3 Flash Cards with Licences 1.2 9500 MPR Packet Node Full Protection (Radio) 6.4 ETH2ETH Blank Page 3 Traffic Management (QoS) 3.3 Adaptive clock recovery Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR 4. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Protections 6.1 Bridge type change 3.2.2 TDM2TDM 2.4 Modem unit QoS 3.3 Ethernet Cross-connection 6 Protections 6.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 5 .4 ODUs Blank Page 2 Traffic profiles 2.6 Ethernet Traffic Management 3.1 Operation and Maintenence Blank Page 5 Cross-connections 5.

1 Operation and Maintenence All This Rights Reservedleft blank intentionally page is © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Table of Contents [cont.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] Switch to notes view! 1·2·6 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 6 .

00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 7 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.1 MSS Architecture 1·2·7 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Core-E platform: symmetrical Cross-connection function able to manage different radio directions add-drop tributaries in case of local PDH/Ethernet accesses 4 x Electrical GbEth + 1 optional Optical GbEth Peripherals (6 modules in MSS-8.1 MSS-8 Architecture 1. 2 modules in MSS-4) 32 x E1 local access module (SCSI 68 32E1) Radio IF interface All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.1 MSS Architecture Core-E Flash PSU Controller RAM Access Peripherals Radio Peripherals 32xE1 Access Module GbEth ETHERNET SWITCH GbEth MODEM 300 Module – IF interface (to ODU) LIU 4x10/100/1000 Ethernet LIU 1x1000 Optical Ethernet 1·2·8 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 8 .

All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 MSS-8 Architecture 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In the figure is shown the easiest configuration: PDH terminal. 1·2·9 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 9 .2 PDH Terminal with PDH local accesses PSU Flash Controller RAM MODEM E1 PDH Access Module (TDMoP) ETHERNET SWITCH 300 Module ODU MSS Core-E LIU 4xEth.2.

3 Flash Cards with Licences Super PDH licences (TDM2TDM): 6x40 Mbps 5x40/1x80 Mbps 4x40/2x80 Mbps 6x80 Mbps 5x40/1x100 Mbps 4x40/2x100 Mbps 6x100 Mbps 5x40/1x150 Mbps 4x40/2x150 Mbps 6x150 Mbps 5x40/1x300 Mbps 4x40/2x300 Mbps 6x300 Mbps 5x40/1x60 Mbps 4x40/2x60 Mbps 6x60 Mbps 5x40/1x130 Mbps 4x40/2x130 Mbps 6x130 Mbps 1 · 2 · 10 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 MSS-8 Architecture 1. The Flash card stores also the Equipment software.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. ETH2ETH. the equipment MIB and the equipment MAC address. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 10 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The licences are stored in the Flash card installed in the Core-E Module. Note: With these flash cards the available circuit emulations are: TDM2TDM.

] Site Aggregator licences (TDM2TDM & TDM2ETH): 6x40 Mbps 5x40/1x80 Mbps 4x40/2x80 Mbps 6x80 Mbps 5x40/1x100 Mbps 4x40/2x100 Mbps 6x100 Mbps 5x40/1x150 Mbps 4x40/2x150 Mbps 6x150 Mbps 5x40/1x300 Mbps 4x40/2x300 Mbps 6x300 Mbps 5x40/1x60 Mbps 4x40/2x60 Mbps 6x60 Mbps 5x40/1x130 Mbps 4x40/2x130 Mbps 6x130 Mbps 1 · 2 · 11 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. ETH2ETH.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 11 . The Flash card stores also the Equipment software. TDM2ETH.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The licences are stored in the Flash card installed in the Core-E Module.1 MSS-8 Architecture 1.2. Note: With these flash cards the available circuit emulations are: TDM2TDM.3 Flash Cards with Licences [cont. the equipment MIB and the equipment MAC address. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

1 MSS-8 Architecture 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 12 .] Adaptive Modulation (TDM2TDM): 5x40/1x130 Mbps 4x40/2x130 Mbps 6x130 Mbps 6x40 4x40/2x80 Mbps 6x80 Mbps 5x40/1x150 Mbps Adaptive Modulation (TDM2ETH): 5x40/1x130 Mbps 4x40/2x130 Mbps 6x130 Mbps 6x40 4x40/2x80 Mbps 6x80 Mbps 5x40/1x150 Mbps 1 · 2 · 12 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3 Flash Cards with Licences [cont.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 ODUs ODU300 are designed for direct-antenna mounting. ODU300 supports: Modulation rates from 4 QAM to 256 QAM Bandwidths from 7 to 56 MHz Frequency bands from 6 to 38 GHz High transmit power 1 · 2 · 13 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 13 .1 MSS-8 Architecture 1.2.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 14 .2.Blank Page 1 · 2 · 14 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

2 Traffic profiles 1 · 2 · 15 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 15 .2.

TDM2TDM ( 9500MPR ⇔ 9500MPR. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Traffic profiles 2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Profiles 1 and 2 meet MEF8 standard All Rights Reserved © 2007. DATA (Ethernet to Ethernet) 1 · 2 · 16 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. internal TDM ) 2.2.1 Traffic profiles Three kinds of traffic profiles have been identified: 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 16 . TDM2Eth ( 9500MPR ⇔ TDM to Ethernet ) 3.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Traffic profiles 2. The Cross connections to be implemented are PDH-Eth type in Node 1. The Cross connections to be implemented are PDH-Radio type in Node 1 and Radio-Eth type in Node 2 Case 3 The E1 stream is inserted/extracted in Node 1. One IWF is inside the 9500 MPR. One IWF is inside the 9500 MPR. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2TDM in Node 1 and Node 2. The Cross connections to be implemented are PDH-Radio type. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2ETH in Node 1 and Node 2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Case 1 The E1 stream is inserted in Node 1 and extracted in Node 2. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Traffic profiles [cont. but the second IWF is external to the 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2ETH in Node 1 and Node 2. but the second IWF is external to the 9500 MPR network. Case 2 The E1 stream is inserted in Node 1 and extracted in Node 2.] 1 · 2 · 17 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 17 . In this case the two IWFs used to packetize the traffic for the Ethernet switch in the Core-E module are both internal to the 9500 MPR network.2.

in case 5 the packets are native Ethernet packets.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Cases 4 and 5 In these cases Ethernet packets enter Node 1 and are extracted in Node 2.] 1 · 2 · 18 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. None of the IWFs belongs to the 9500 MPR network. No Cross connections must be implemented. The path is automatically implemented with the standard autolearning algorithm of the 9500 MPR Ethernet switch.2 Traffic profiles 2. The Circuit Emulation Service is ETH2ETH in Node 1 and Node 2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Traffic profiles [cont.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 18 . In case 4 the Ethernet packets encapsulate the E1 stream.2.

2 TDM2TDM E1 traffic packetized only internally to 9500MPR equipment RADIO BTS E1 RADIO RADIO PDH E1 BTS E1 BSC BTS E1 1 · 2 · 19 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Flow Id present (user defined) intermediate node configuration (E1 provisioning): node by node (building Cross-connection tables based on Flow Id) bandwidth guaranteed (according to QoS no flooding-autolearning necessary Highest Queue Priority association) All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 Traffic profiles 2.2.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 19 .

have predetermined values and don’t need to be provisioned.2. Mac addresses are determined as consequences of the cross connections.2 Traffic profiles 2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 ECID = Emulated Circuit Identifier All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 TDM2TDM [cont. The IWF parameters listed above. Payload size is fixed to 122 bytes ECID will be the same value as Flow Id TDM clock source: clock recovery differential. Flow Id provisioned by ECT/NMS 1 · 2 · 20 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 20 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] Both the IWFs belong to 9500MPR and the packets are not supposed to exit the 9500 MPR network.

3 TDM2Eth E1 traffic both internal and external to 9500MPR equipment E1 BTS PSN Eth E1 BTS Eth E1 BSC E1 BTS 1 · 2 · 21 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 Traffic profiles 2.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 21 .2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Flow Id present (user defined) all the parameters must be configured compliant with the MEF8 standard adaptive or differential clock recovery supported bandwidth guaranteed (according to QoS Highest Queue Priority association) destination MAC added before going into whole network (MEF8 compliant) All Rights Reserved © 2007.

the destination Mac address will be provisioned by ECT/NMS.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 22 .] Only one of the IWFs belongs to 9500MPR and the packets are supposed to exit the 9500MPR network.3 TDM2Eth [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 ECID = Emulated Circuit Identifier All Rights Reserved © 2007. clock recovery differential Flow Id is provisioned by ECT/NMS (One Vlan is assigned to each bi-directional circuit emulated E1 flow) 1 · 2 · 22 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. MAC addresses: in all involved nodes are determined as consequences of the cross connections.2 Traffic profiles 2. Payload size: fixed to 256 bytes ECID : provisioned by ECT/NMS. In such ETN the source address is the node Mac address. 2 different values may be used for each direction TDM clock source is provisioned by ECT/NMS: clock recovery adaptive. the only exception is the Ethernet Terminal Node (the node where the TDM2ETH traffic goes through an user Ethernet port).2.

All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.2 Traffic profiles 2.4 ETH2ETH WiMAX (NodeB) Eth Eth PSN Eth Eth RNC PSN WiMAX (NodeB) Eth WiMAX (NodeB) Eth Eth RNC None of the IWFs belongs to 9500MPR. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 1 · 2 · 23 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Any packet belonging to an Eth2Eth TDM flow is treated as any other Ethernet packet with the only exception of giving it an higher priority based on the MEF 8 Ethertype. None of the parameters listed in the previous slide has to be configured (the 9500 MPR is transparent).00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 23 .

00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 24 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.Blank Page 1 · 2 · 24 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 25 .2.3 Traffic Management (QoS) 1 · 2 · 25 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

2. 1 · 2 · 26 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Both those QoS functions must be properly configured in order to get the wished behavior on Ethernet flows that will be transmitted towards the Radio.3 Traffic Management (QoS) 3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Quality Of Services (QoS) The QoS function inside 9500 MPR is the result of a distributed implementation in the switch and Radio Interface module.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 26 .

3 Traffic Management (QoS)

3.2 Core-E QoS

1 · 2 · 27
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

The figure shows an overview of the QoS implementation inside the switch. The Quality of Service feature of the Ethernet switch provides four internal queues per port to support four different traffic priorities. Typically the high-priority traffic experiences less delay than that lowpriority in the switch under congested conditions. For each egress port according to method of QoS classification configured in the switch, the packets are assigned to each queue. The higher priority queue is reserved for TDM flows; the remaining queues are shared by all Ethernet flows according the classification mechanism configured by CT/NMS. For generic Ethernet flows in the switch it is possible by CT/NMS to assign the priority to each packet according to the information in:
1.

IEEE std 802.1p: the packet is examined for the presence of a valid 802.1P user-priority tag. If the tag is present the correspondent priority is assigned to the packet.

802.1P priority Queue 111, 110 Q5 (higher priority) 101 Q4 100 Q3 011, 000 Q2 2. DiffServ: each packet is classified based on DSCP field in the IP header to determine the priority. 010, 001 Q1

DiffServ priority 111000, 110000, 101110, 101000 100110, 100100, 100010, 100000 011110, 011100, 011010, 011000 010110, 010100, 010010, 010000 001110, 001100, 001010, 001000 000000 All remaining values

Queue Q5 (higher priority) Q4 Q3 Q2

Q1

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 27

3 Traffic Management (QoS)

3.3 Core-E scheduler
The scheduler algorithm cannot be configured. HQP scheduler algorithm is used on queues Q8, Q7 and Q6. Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR) is used on the other queues with the following weights:

QUEUE Q5 (higher priority) Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1

WEIGHT 16 8 4 2 1

1 · 2 · 28
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 28

3 Traffic Management (QoS)

3.4 Modem unit QoS

1 · 2 · 29
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

In the figure is shown an overview of the QoS implementation inside the Radio Interface module. The QoS feature provides eight internal queues to support different traffic priorities. The QoS function can assign the packet to one of the eight egress transmit queues according to the information inside the packet as 802.1P field, DiffServ field, Ethertype or 802.1Q VLAN_ID. QoS based on IEEE std. 802.1p When 802.1p QoS mechanism is adopted, the reference is the standard “IEEE 802.1D-2004 Annex G User priorities and traffic classes” that defines 7 traffic types and the corresponding user priority values. Considering that in the Radio Interface module for generic Ethernet traffic there are five egress queues the mapping 802.1p value to queue is the following:

QoS based on DiffServ

802.1p priority 111, 110 101 100 011, 000 010, 001

Queue Q5 (higher priority) Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1

DiffServ priority 111000, 110000, 101110, 101000 100110, 100100, 100010, 100000 011110, 011100, 011010, 011000 010110, 010100, 010010, 010000 001010, 001100, 001010, 001000, 000000 All remaining values

Queue Q5 (higher priority) Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 29

3 Traffic Management (QoS)

3.5 Modem unit scheduler
The scheduler algorithm implemented inside the Modem unit is High Queue Pre-empt: when a packet arrives in the higher priority queue it is immediately transmitted.

1 · 2 · 30
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 30

3 Traffic Management (QoS)

3.6 Ethernet Traffic Management
The Ethernet traffic is all the traffic entered the MPR network from user Ethernet ports. By ECT/NMS it is possible to define the way to manage the Ethernet traffic according to one of the following options:
802.1D (MAC Address bridge) 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge)

1 · 2 · 31
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 31

3.6 Ethernet Traffic Management

3.6.1 Bridge type change
In case of change of the bridge type from 802.1Q to 802.1D, the content of the VLAN table and the VLAN assigned to the user Ethernet ports, remains stored in the NE MIB. Note: To change the configuration from 802.1D to 802.1Q, it is necessary to configure all the Ethernet ports in “Admit all” mode to avoid hits on the traffic on that specific port.

1 · 2 · 32
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 32

3.6 Ethernet Traffic Management

3.6.2 Reserved Multicast Addresses
Reserved Multicast Address 01-80-C2-00-00-00 01-80-C2-00-00-01 01-80-C2-00-00-02 01-80-C2-00-00-03 Bridge Group Address Clause 31 (MAC Control) of IEEE 802.3 Clause 43 (Link Aggregation) and Clause 57 (OAM) of IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.1X PAE address

Function

Action Forward Flow-Control enabled: Peer Flow-Control disabled: Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward

01-80-C2-00-00-04 - 01Reserved for future standardization 80-C2-00-00-0D 01-80-C2-00-00-0E 01-80-C2-00-00-0F 01-80-C2-00-00-10 IEEE 802.1AB LLDP multicast address Reserved for future standardization All LANs Bridge Management Group Address

01-80-C2-00-00-11 - 01Reserved 80-C2-00-00-1F 01-80-C2-00-00-20 01-80-C2-00-00-21 GMRP Address (Clause 10 of IEEE 802.1D) GVRP Address (IEEE 802.1Q)

01-80-C2-00-00-22 - 01Reserved for GARP Application 80-C2-00-00-2F 01-80-C2-00-00-30 - 01- CCM and LTM Group Destination MAC Addresses (IEEE 80-C2-00-00-3F 802.1ag)

1 · 2 · 33
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

The table summarizes the actions taken for specific reserved multicast addresses. Frames identified with these destination addresses are handled uniquely since they are designed for Layer 2 Control Protocols. The actions taken by the system can be: Discard - The system discards all ingress Ethernet frames and must not generate any egress Ether-net Frame carrying the reserved multicast address. Forward - The system accepts all ingress Ethernet frames as standard multicast frames and for-wards them accordingly. Peer - The system acts as a peer of the connected device in the operation of the relevant Layer 2 Control Protocol.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 33

Blank Page

1 · 2 · 34
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 34

4 Synchronisation

1 · 2 · 35
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 35

4 Synchronisation

4.1 Synchronisation
TDM data flow is fragmented and the fragments are transmitted over a Packet Switched Network (PSN); The received fragments need to be reassembled in the original TDM data flow at the “original bit rate” Two main methods can be used to recover at the RX site, the original bit rate:
Differential clock recovery: recalculation of the original clock based of the Delta respect to a reference clock that is available at both TX and RX site Adaptive clock recovery: based on the average rate at which the packets (fragments) arrive at RX site

1 · 2 · 36
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Adaptive: simpler network, but performances depends on the PDV (Packet Delay Variation) in the Network. Always used when the reference clock isn’t distributed on the whole network. Differential: used in case of clock distribution on the whole network. It’s more reliable than Adaptive; also used in TDM2TDM traffic (MPR to MPR). N.B.: In meshed networks (rings) do not close the synchronisation configuration.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 36

4 Synchronisation

4.2 Differential clock recovery

End System1 IWF

PSN PSN

End System2 IWF

1 · 2 · 37
Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Common reference clock IS available at both Ends. IWF system, at RX side, generate output clock based on RTP TimeStamps which are sent together with each Fragments.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 37

All Rights Reserved © 2007. generate output clock based on data arrival rate: TDM clock is slowly adjusted to maintain the average fill level of a jitter buffer at its midpoint. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. at RX side. IWF system.3 Adaptive clock recovery End System1 IWF PSN PSN End System2 IWF 1 · 2 · 38 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 Synchronisation 4.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Common reference clock is NOT available at both Ends.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 38 .

4 Synchronisation 4.2. 5. 10.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. both for primary and secondary.048.000 MHz] radio interface 1 · 2 · 39 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. for each node must be defined: NE Role definition. related to NE CK Master Slave NE Synchronisation Source definition Primary Secondary Source choice.4 Synchronisation Interface To implement differential CK recovery.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 39 .000. with proper rule free running PDH interface [port] external interface [2.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 40 .2.Blank Page 1 · 2 · 40 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 41 .5 Cross-connections 1 · 2 · 41 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.

The decision made by the switch to forward the received packet is based on the destination MAC address.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 42 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5 Cross-connections 5.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Cross-connection SLOT 3 (PDH) SLOT 5 SLOT 7 SLOT 4 (RADIO) SLOT 6 (RADIO) SLOT 8 ETH 4 ETH 2 ETH 1 ETH 3 1 · 2 · 42 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The cross-connections between slots and between slot and Ethernet user ports are realized with a Layer-2 Ethernet Switch inside the Main Core-E.

2 E1 Cross-connection Each E1 can be cross connected independently E1 can be cross connected to any of the following interfaces: Radio interface Ethernet interface Each E1 (board #.5 Cross-connections 5.2.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 43 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. port #) must be associated to a signal flow ID 1 · 2 · 43 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 44 .2.5 Cross-connections 5.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. as reported in an “Address Resolution Table” (ART) If destination address is not present in the ART a flooding mechanism is foreseen 1 · 2 · 44 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3 Ethernet Cross-connection Ethernet cross connection is based on Ethernet switching (level 2) According to destination address each packet is switched to the correct port.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 45 .6 Protections 1 · 2 · 45 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.

Core-E selects the best signal.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 46 . 3) HSB (Hot StandBy) Spare ODU module is powered off.1 Protections Supported Protection types : 1) RPS (Radio Protection Switching) Hitless for each radio direction (RPS-RX) RPS is distributed in 9500 MSS modules before termination of 9500 MSS frame.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 2) EPS (Equipment Protection Switching) for each module type Both Working and Spare modules send its own signal to the Core-E.6 Protections 6. 1 · 2 · 46 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.

00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 47 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Legend: 1 2 3 RPS EPS HSB All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.2 9500 MPR Packet Node Full Protection (Radio) 1 · 2 · 47 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.6 Protections 6.

00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 48 .6 Protections 6.] 2 2 1 · 2 · 48 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Legend: 2 EPS All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 9500 MSS Packet Node Full Protection (Radio) [cont.2.

00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 49 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.6 Protections 6. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3 RPS Switching Criteria The switching criteria are: Early Warning High BER Dem Fail Loss of Frame (LOF) on the radio signal coming from the direct way Loss of Frame (LOF) on the radio signal coming from the cross way 1 · 2 · 49 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 EPS Switching Criteria The switching criteria are: Peripheral Card Fail (switching off of the peripheral included) Peripheral Card Missing LOS of all the tributaries (of course only in case of PDH local access peripheral protection) managed via SW.6 Protections 6. 1 · 2 · 50 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 50 .

5 HSB Switching Criteria The switching criteria are : Radio Interface Peripheral Card Fail (switching off of the peripheral included) Radio Interface Peripheral Card Missing MSS-ODU cable loss ODU TX chain alarm (this is an OR of the following alarms: LOS at ODU input. txFail.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.6 Protections 6.2. modFail. ODU card fail) 1 · 2 · 51 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 51 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

End of Module Architecture 1 · 2 · 52 Product Overview · Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 52 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 1 Product Overview Module 3 Management System 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 1 .

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Blank Page 1·3·2 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 2 .2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2007-07-30 Author External consultant Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © 2007.

00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 3 .2.Objectives Objectives: to be able to describe the Management System of the 9500 MPR. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 1·3·3 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Objectives [cont.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 4 .2.1 Operation and Maintenence This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] 1·3·4 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Management System 1.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 5 .1 Network Management 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 IP addresses 1.3 TMN communication channels 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 LCT Connection Answer the Questions Blank Page End of Module Page 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1·3·5 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

] Switch to notes view! 1·3·6 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 6 .Table of Contents [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights This page is Reserved blank intentionally left © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.1 Management System 1·3·7 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 7 .

Alcatel-Lucent offers a unified management system capable to manage the entire access and transport network under a single Network Management Suite: the 1350 OMS. 9500 MPR together with all other Microwave and Optical transmission Network Element is fully integrated into 1350 OMS Network Management System providing all the tools required to operate the network All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Management System 1.2.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 8 .1 Network Management All Access and Transport Integrated in a single Network Management Suite Multi-protocol management SNMP Q3 1350 OMS Access & Transport Network Management QB3* TL1 9400 AWY New 1642EM 9500 MPR 1662SMC 1650SMC 1850TSS 9600 LSY 9600 USY 9500 MXC 1·3·8 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Providing a single managed network reduce the operational expenditure of a network directly improving the margin in the P&L of an Operator. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 9 .0. 1·3·9 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 IP addresses The NE has the following IP addresses: NE IP address: it is the Controller IP address (default IP address = 10. but for TMN.255. the TMN IP addresses of 2 NEs connected through an Ethernet cable must belong to the same subnetwork.2 with fixed mask 255.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 As example of the IP address assignment refer to the attached diagram. TMN Port 4 IP address: the Port 4 can be used not for traffic. TMN IP address: it is the IP address relevant to the Ethernet TMN port (default IP address = 10.1.255.255).2. IP address assignment rules: the TMN IP addresses of 2 NEs connected through a radio link must belong to 2 different subnetworks.2 with mask 255.255.255.1.1 Management System 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.0.0).

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 TMN communication channels On the 9500 MPR two types of TMN communication channels are present: TMN channel carried by 64 kbits/sec channel inside Radio frame. 1 · 3 · 10 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 10 .1 Management System 1. TMN channel carried by Ethernet frames in Ethernet tributary 4 (on the front panel of the Core-E module).2.

00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 11 .2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4 LCT Connection 9500MPR can be controlled by a LCT connected to the Core-E unit.1 Management System 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. The connection can be performed by using: The dedicated NMS Ethernet port Traffic Ethernet port. 1 · 3 · 11 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. configured as TMN port.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.Answer the Questions How many IP addresses can be assigned to the NE? Which bit rate has been assigned to the TMN RF channel in the Radio frame? Which connections are available for the LCT? 1 · 3 · 12 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 12 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

0.4 00:20:60:27:02:05 10.10.3 00:20:60:27:02:07 OFF 0.1 11 12 13 14 27 28 41 42 TDM B TDM C PC IP 10.10.30.0.3.3.3.255.0.0.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 13 .3 10.0.0.0. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.0.0.6 10.0.6 0.0.0.0.2 00:20:60:05:02:08 OFF 0.5.2.1 Blank Page 00:20:60:05:02:07 OFF 0.1 10.1 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1.2 10.30.0.3.0.0.6.5 00:20:60:05:02:06 OFF 0.2.0.0 TDM A NE IP NMS IP NE MAC NMS P4 OSPF AREA 10.0.3.0.255.4 10.1 ETH 2 All Rights Reserved © 2007.0.0.4.4 0.0.1 NE IP NMS IP NE MAC NMS P4 OSPF AREA 10.0.0.6.6.10.0.0.0.6 ETH 1 VLAN ID 41 42 10 11 Node E Node F TDM B NE IP NMS IP NE MAC NMS P4 OSPF AREA 10.100 10.5.1 27 28 1 2 Node B TDM C NE IP NMS IP NE MAC NMS P4 OSPF AREA 1 · 3 · 13 10.0.1 Operation and Maintenence Net Mask VLAN ID 255.0.… VLAN ID ETH Generator PDH Generator Syncro Scheme Node C Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.100 10.2.4.5 10.1 11 12 13 14 1+1 FD 5 6 7 8 Node D PC IP DEFAULT GATEWAY 10.3.6 00:20:60:05:02:05 10.VLAN ID NE IP NMS IP 10.… Port Number NE IP NMS IP NE MAC NMS P4 OSPF AREA 10.0.1 1 2 3 4 17 18 3132 NE MAC NMS P4 OSPF AREA Node A TDM A ETH 1 ETH 2 VLAN ID DEFAULT GATEWAY 1+1 HSB Traffic E1+ETH TMN Traffic E1 TDM2ETH Traffic E1 TDM2TDM Traffic ETH 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.End of Module Management System 1 · 3 · 14 Product Overview · Management System 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 14 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.

00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 1 .Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 2 Functional Description Module 1 MSS HW Hardware Architecture 3JK Edition 1.00 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 2 .2.Blank Page 2·1·2 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2007-07-30 Author External Consultant Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Objectives Objectives: to be able to describe the functionality of each unit of the MSS-4/MSS-8. 2·1·3 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 3 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.

] 2·1·4 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 4 .Objectives [cont.2.1 Operation and Maintenence This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.1 Core-E unit Blank Page 4 Distributors 4.1 PDH Access unit Blank Page 2 Modem unit 2.1 Distributor Answer the Questions Blank Page End of Module Page 7 8 10 11 12 14 15 16 18 19 20 29 30 31 2·1·5 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 5 .Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 PDH Access Unit 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Modem unit Blank Page 3 Core-E unit 3.

1 Operation and Maintenence All This Rights Reservedleft blank intentionally page is © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Table of Contents [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 6 .] Switch to notes view! 2·1·6 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.

1 PDH Access Unit 2·1·7 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 7 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 PDH Access Unit 1. the E1 PDH card (E1 Access) processes and encapsulates up to 32 E1 input lines into an Ethernet packet that is sent to the Core-E card(s).1 PDH Access unit 32 E1 module wk Core-E 32 E1 LIUs FPGA (Ceres) CESoP sp Core-E wk Core-E sp Core-E 2·1·8 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. In the RX direction. Selection of the Active Core-E Sending/getting those std Eth packets to the Core-E module Communication with the Controller for provisioning and status report The module communicates with the Core-E modules through two GbEth Serial copper bi-directional interfaces on the backplane. The spare Core-E in not implemented. The 32xE1 Local Access Module performs the following macro functions: Termination of 32 E1 signals (32 E1 bi-directional interfaces according ITU-T G.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In the TX direction.703 on the front panel) Framed E1 bi-directional alarm management Bi-directional Performance Monitoring on Framed E1 Encapsulation/Extraction of those PDH data flows into/from standard Ethernet packets Inter Working Function Reconstruction of the original PDH Timing meeting G823/824 Req. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 8 . the E1 Access card extracts data from the Ethernet data packets and processes the data to provide up to 32 E1 output lines.2.

] E1 17-32 E1 1-16 2·1·9 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 9 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 PDH Access Unit 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 PDH Access unit [cont.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 10 .2.Blank Page 2 · 1 · 10 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 11 .2 Modem unit 2 · 1 · 11 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.

2 Modem unit 2. the MODEM 300 Module generates the IF signal to be sent to an MXC Out Door Unit. the MODEM 300 Module terminates the IF signal coming from the MXC Out Door Unit extracting the original CBR and then the original Ethernet packets to be given the Core-E which distributes them to the proper Module. Digital Framer Classification of incoming packets from the Core-E (QoS) Fragmentation Air Frame Generation (synchronous with NE clock) Digital Modulator TX Analog Chain DAC & low pass filtering Modulation to 311 MHz IF TX In Rx direction.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In Tx direction.2.1 Modem unit FPGA (Guinnes) AIR FRAMER PDH/Data management IDU/ODU communication MODEM ASIC AIR deFRAMER PDH/Data management ODU/IDU communication I RX DEMOD Q 311 Mhz ∏/2 IF cable interface ADC ADC IF RX I TX MODULATOR Q DAC DAC EPS TX IF TX RPS RX 126 Mhz ∏/2 Analog Chain GbE Serial from/to Alternate Radio Board for RPS 2 · 1 · 12 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Such signal contains a Constant Bit Rate signal built with the Ethernet packets coming from the Core-E.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 12 . RX Analog Chain 126 MHz IF RX demodulation to I & Q low pass filtering & ADC Digital Demodulator Carrier & CK recovery Equalisation Error Correction Digital Deframer RPS (hitless) Defragmentation All Rights Reserved © 2007. those packets are managed in a different way depending on their own native nature.

1 Modem unit [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Modem unit 2.2.] Transmitter connected to the antenna 2 · 1 · 13 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 13 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Blank Page 2 · 1 · 14 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 14 .2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.

2.3 Core-E unit 2 · 1 · 15 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 15 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

the equipment software. VLAN management & MAC based Ethernet MAC learning x-connect function for PDH and Data payload traffic.3 Core-E unit 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. the equipment MIB and the equipment MAC address.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 16 . available with an optical plug-in.1 Core-E unit 2 · 1 · 16 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. QoS management.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Based on packet technology with 8 GbEth serial internal interfaces between Core-E and peripherals (jumbo frames 9728 bytes allowed) 4x10/100/1000 Eth embedded interface (RJ45) 1x1000 base-Lx or Sx (SFP optical interference). The flash card stores the licence type. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. Macro Functions Controller Layer 2+ Eth Switch. Selection of the synchronization Ck to be distributed to all plug-in. For any “packetized” flow. the switch will be in charge to manage the EPS also.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 17 .] 2 · 1 · 17 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.3 Core-E unit 3.1 Core-E unit [cont.

Blank Page 2 · 1 · 18 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 18 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 Distributors 2 · 1 · 19 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 19 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.

4 Distributors 4. 2 · 1 · 20 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 20 .2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Distributor The Distributor subracks available are shown in the next pages.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1 Distributor [cont.0/2.] Protection Panel 32E1 SCSI 68 .00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 21 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4 Distributors 4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 75 ohm (Front/Rear) (3DB16104AAAA) 2 · 1 · 21 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1.2.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.4 Distributors 4.1 Distributor [cont.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 22 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] Protection Panel RJ45 120 ohm (Front/Rear) (1AF15245ABAA) 2 · 1 · 22 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Distributor [cont.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 23 .6 75 ohm (Front) 2 · 1 · 23 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.6/5. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] Protection Panel 32E1 SCSI 68 .1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 Distributors 4.

00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 24 .4 Distributors 4.] Protection Panel 32E1 BNC 75 ohm (Front) 2 · 1 · 24 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Distributor [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] Connector support 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 25 .6/5.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4 Distributors 4.1 Distributor [cont.6 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061AAAA) 2 · 1 · 25 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Distributor [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] Connector support BNC 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061ABAA) 2 · 1 · 26 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 26 .4 Distributors 4.2.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 27 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.4 Distributors 4.1 Distributor [cont.] Support 19 Inch modules 120 ohm Panel 3U (3CC07810AAAA) 2 · 1 · 27 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] E1 Protection SCSI 68/Sub-D 37 (Front/Rear) (3DB16102AAAA) 2 · 1 · 28 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.4 Distributors 4.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 28 .1 Distributor [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Answer the Questions How many E1 streams are available on the front panel of the PDH access unit? When the Power Emission Status LED of the Modem unit is green ON in the HSB configuration? Which information is stored in the Flash Card installed in the Core-E unit? 2 · 1 · 29 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 29 .

2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.End of Module MSS HW Hardware Architecture 2 · 1 · 30 Functional Description · MSS HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 1 · Page 30 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 1 .00 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 2 Functional Description Module 2 ODU HW Hardware Architecture 3JK Edition 1.

00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 2 .Blank Page 2·2·2 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date YYYY-MM-DD Author Last name. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. first name Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Objectives Objectives: to be able to describe the functionality of the ODUs. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. 2·2·3 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 3 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Objectives [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 4 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] 2·2·4 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 ODU300 Construction and Mounting 1.5 Waveguide Flange Data 3.2 ODU300 Characteristics 2 ODU300 block diagram 2.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Outdoor Units 1.2.6 Grounding the ODU 3.7 ODU external connectors Answer the Questions End of Module Page 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 23 24 2·2·5 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 5 .1 Installing the ODU 3.3 Remote-Mounted ODUs solution 1 3.4 Remote-Mounted ODUs solution 2 3.1 ODU300 block diagram 3 Outdoor Installations 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 Direct-Mounted ODUs 3.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights This page is Reserved blank intentionally left © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.Table of Contents [cont.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 6 .] Switch to notes view! 2·2·6 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 7 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Outdoor Units 2·2·7 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 8 . Equal loss is nominally 3. Unequal is nominally 1. The ODUs. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The ODUs include a waveguide antenna port. a direct-mounting coupler is used. All Rights Reserved © 2007.0 dB. are designed for direct antenna attachment via an 9500MPR-specific mounting collar supplied with the antennas. They are available for equal or unequal loss operation.0 dB. ODUs are fixed for Tx High or Tx Low operation.1 ODU300 Construction and Mounting Construction comprises: Cast aluminium base Pressed aluminium cover Base and cover passivated and then polyester powder coated Compression seal for base-cover weatherproofing Carry-handle ODU300 Housing 2·2·8 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Type-N female connector for the ODU cable. a BNC female connector (with captive protection cap) for RSSI access.5/6. Where two ODUs are to be connected to a single antenna for hot-standby or frequency diversity configurations. ODU polarization is determined by the position of a polarization rotator fitted within the mounting collar. or to a dual-polarized antenna for co-channel link operation.1 Outdoor Units 1. and a grounding stud.0/3. These may be used to connect an ODU to a standard antenna. A remote ODU mounting kit is available as an option.

7.2 ODU300 Characteristics General Specification Frequency Band options Modulation support L6.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 9 . 18. All Rights Reserved © 2007. 16.3 mm Cable length [NB] Transmit Receive MSS to ODU 311 MHz 126 MHz 150 meters 2·2·9 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. 128 QAM IF Specifications Intermediate Frequency Maximum IF 10. 28. 26. 64.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. U6. 8. 11.1 Outdoor Units 1. 32. 13. 15. 23.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 [NB] Longer distances are possible using higher specification cable. 38 GHz 4.

standard 6-38 GHz.2 ODU300 Characteristics [cont.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 10 .8m Remote mount via flex/elliptical waveguide Polarisation. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. optional 2 · 2 · 10 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Outdoor Units 1.8m Remote mount for antenna diameters >1. field selectable Antenna Mounting 6-38 GHz.] ODU Interfaces IF cable connector AGC monitor point Antenna port Interface 6-38 GHz N-Type BNC Standard EIA rectangular waveguide.2. refer to ODU System specifications Vertical (standard) or Horizontal Proprietary direct mount for antenna diameters 0.3 to 1.

00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 11 .2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 ODU300 block diagram 2 · 2 · 11 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

It is used to confirm transmit output power for performance monitoring purposes. The ODU microprocessor is managed under the NCC microprocessor. the signal from the diplexer is passed via the LNA (Low Noise Amplifier) to the Rx mixer.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 12 . Here the 311 MHz IF is demodulated to derive the separate I and Q signals using the 10 MHz synchronizing reference signal from the MSS.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The quadrature modulated 311 MHz IF signal from the MSS is extracted at the N-Plexer and passed via a cable AGC circuit to an IQ demodulator/modulator. it provides the selected transmit frequency. transmit power. The split options provided are based on ETSI plans for each frequency band. Between the IQ modulator and the mixer. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. which has been set to a specific frequency between 1700 and 2300 MHz. with which it communicates via the telemetry channel.2. a variable attenuator provides software adjustment of Tx power. A power monitor circuit is included in the common port of the diplexer assembly to provide measurement of transmit power. and in the IF mixer. In the receive direction. A DC-DC converter provides the required low-voltage DC rails from the -48 Vdc supply. It is then amplified in a gain-controlled stage to compensate for fluctuations in receive level. and alarm and performance monitoring. These I and Q signals modulate a Tx IF. the transmit signal is amplified in the PA (Power Amplifier) and passed via the diplexer to the antenna feed port. Both the IF and Tx local oscillators are synthesizer types. The offset of the transmit frequencies at each end of the link is determined by the required Tx/Rx split. A microprocessor in the ODU supports configuration of the synthesizers. The actual frequency range per band and the allowable Tx/Rx splits are range-limited within 9500MPR to prevent incorrect user selection. is converted to a 126 MHz IF for transport via the ODU cable to the MSS. After the mixer. where it is mixed with the receive local oscillator (RXLO) input to provide an IF of between 1700 and 2300 MHz.2 ODU300 block diagram 2.1 ODU300 block diagram To MSS 2 · 2 · 12 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. such that when mixed with the Tx local oscillator signal (TXLO) in the subsequent mixer stage. and to provide a closed-loop for power level management over the specified ODU temperature and frequency range.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 Outdoor Installations 2 · 2 · 13 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 13 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

3 Outdoor Installations 3. On the next slides.1 Installing the ODU All ODUs are designed for direct-mounting to a collar supplied with direct-fit antennas.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. information are given concerning: Direct-Mounted ODUs Remote-Mounted ODUs Grounding the ODU 2 · 2 · 14 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 14 . For single-antenna protected operation a coupler is available to support direct mounting of the two ODUs to its antenna.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. ODUs can also be installed with standard antennas using a remote-mount kit. or to support direct mounting onto a remote-mounted coupler.

2 Direct-Mounted ODUs The ODU is attached to its mounting collar using four mounting bolts.3 Outdoor Installations 3. as shown in Figure. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. Pressed-Cover ODU and Mounting Collar 2 · 2 · 15 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. which have captive 19 mm (3/4”) nuts for fastening.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 15 . The ODU mounts directly to its antenna mount.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

using a remote-mount to support the ODU.3 Remote-Mounted ODUs (solution 1) 2 · 2 · 16 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. The mount can also be used to remotely support a protected ODU pairing installed on a coupler.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 16 . Both flange ends are identical. The coupler connects to the remote mount assembly in the same way as an ODU. and is common to all frequency bands. along with flange mounting bolts.3 Outdoor Installations 3. and a flexible-waveguide or coaxial cable to connect the ODU to its antenna: a flexible waveguide is required. single or dual polarization antennas. which is supplied with the waveguide. 600 mm (2 ft) or 900 mm (3 ft). All Rights Reserved © 2007. Figure shows an ODU installed on a remote mount. The remote mount allows use of standard. and are grooved for a half-thickness gasket. The remote mount clamps to a standard 112 mm (4”) pole-mount. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 ODUs can be installed separately from its antenna. Flexible waveguides are frequency band specific and are normally available in two lengths.

4 Remote-Mounted ODUs (solution 2) 2 · 2 · 17 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 17 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 Outdoor Installations 3.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] 2 · 2 · 18 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3 Outdoor Installations 3.2.4 Remote-Mounted ODUs (solution 2) [cont.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 18 .

7 M4x0. flush-face flange with threaded.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 19 .8 M4x0.2mm Flange thickness + Hole depth .7 M4x0. 6-hole or 8-hole flange with gasket groove and clear holes. blind holes. UBR/PDR flanges are square.2mm Flange thickness + Hole depth . On the ODU. 4-hole flange with a gasket groove and clear holes.5 Waveguide Flange Data Spring Washers Reqd 8 x M5 8 x M4 8 x M4 4 x M4 4 x M4 4 x M3 4 x M3 Hole Depth mm 10 8 8 8 8 6 6 Freq Band 6 GHz 7/8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18/23/26 GHz 28/32/38 GHz Radio Flange UDR70 UDR84 UDR100 UBR120 UBR140 UBR220 UBR320 WaveguideM Waveguide ating Flange Type PDR70 PDR84 PDR100 PBR120 PBR140 PBR220 PBR320 WR137 WR112 WR90 WR75 WR62 WR42 WR28 Bolts Reqd 8 8 8 4 4 4 4 Bolt Type M5x0. All Rights Reserved © 2007.5 Thread Spec 6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6H Bolt Length Required Flange thickness + Hole depth . All fastening hardware is metric. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.7 M3x0. blind holes. UBR.5 M3x0. 4-hole flush-face flange with threaded. UDR/PDR flanges are rectangular.2. the two flange styles are: UDR. 6-hole or 8-hole (6/8 bolt holes depending on frequency range/waveguide type).1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Table lists the antenna port flange types.7 M4x0.2mm Flange thickness + Hole depth .3 Outdoor Installations 3. plus their mating flange options and fastening hardware for remote mount installations.2mm Flange thickness + Hole depth .2mm Flange thickness + Hole depth .2mm Flange thickness + Hole depth .2mm 2 · 2 · 19 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. PBR. The corresponding mating flange styles are: PDR.

Failure to do so can invalidate the warranty.6 Grounding the ODU The one ground wire can be used to ground both the ODU and the suppressor only in case a pressed-cover ODU is installed with a suppressor support bracket.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The ODU must be installed with a lightning surge suppressor. and one to ground the ODU.3 Outdoor Installations 3. For all other set-ups. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. one ground wire must be installed to ground the suppressor. 2 · 2 · 20 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 20 .

7 ODU external connectors Vertical Polarization Horizontal Polarization IF cable connector (to Indoor Unit) RSSI connector Waveguide feed head RSSI connector IF cable connector (to Indoor Unit) 2 · 2 · 21 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3 Outdoor Installations 3.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 21 .2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

25 Vdc is equivalent to -10 dBm RSSI.5 -20 Measurement 0.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. RSSI Table Units BNC (Vdc) RSSI (dBm) 0. There is a linear relationship of voltage to RSSI. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. and each additional 0.0 1. The RSSI figures in dBm are identical to the RSL figures displayed in A9500 MPR Craft Terminal.75 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 2.25 -90 2.25 -10 0. as shown in the table below.5 1.2.00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 22 .3 Outdoor Installations 3.25 1. an RSSI of 0.5 -100 2 · 2 · 22 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.75 1.25 Vdc RSSI increase thereafter corresponds to a 10 dBm decrease in RSSI.0 -80 2. The lower the voltage the higher RSSI and better aligned the antenna is.7 ODU external connectors [cont.] RSSI Monitoring Point The ODU has a capped BNC female connector to access RSSI during antenna alignment.

00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 23 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Answer the Questions Which modulations are supported in the ODU? Which is the maximum length of the IF cable? Can the ODU be directly connected to the antenna? When must be used the RSSI monitoring point? 2 · 2 · 23 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.

00 Section 2 · Module 2 · Page 24 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.End of Module ODU HW Hardware Architecture 2 · 2 · 24 Functional Description · ODU HW Hardware Architecture 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 1 .Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 3 NE operation Module 1 Operator interface 3JK Edition 1.

2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2007-07-30 Author External Consultant Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © 2007.Blank Page 3·1·2 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 2 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Objectives Objectives: to be able to understand all the menus available with the LCT.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3·1·3 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 3 .

] 3·1·4 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 4 .Objectives [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

7 Creation Dialogs 3.1 Local Configuration NE operation · Operator interface 3.6.4 Supervision Function 1.2 Radio-Radio 3.Ethernet 3.Ethernet 3.3 Status & Alarms area 1.3 Menu Network Configuration All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 · 1 · 5 3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 5 .5.2 Menu NE Time 3.2 Graphical Area 3.5.14 Cross-Connections with TDM2Eth Profile 3.3 Buttons 3.5. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Menu Configuration 3.5 Management State Control Panel 2.9 Possible Cross-Connections 3.15.6 Suggested sequence for NETO interface and NE list Blank Page 2 Main View 2.5.2 NE Configuration area 1.1D 3.13 PDH .5.6 How to create a cross-connection 3.5.3.6.5.3 IP Static Routing Configuration 3.12 Radio .2.4 PDH-Ethernet 3.5.5 Routing Information 3.2.5.5.1 Operation and Maintenence 3.1 NE Information 1.4 OSPF Area Configuration 3.5.6.5 How to segregate slots or ports 3.1 VLAN 1 Management 3.2.3.5.1Q 3.11 Radio .3.6.5.5.1 802.5.2.8 Information Dialogs 3.3 Radio-Ethernet 3.4 Segregated port view 3.15 How to modify a cross-connection 3.2 NTP Configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 802.15.1 Main view 2.3 Command Buttons 1.2 NE Description 1.5.5.6 Menu VLAN Configuration 3.10 PDH – Radio 3.5 Menu Bar 1.5.Radio 3.2 VLAN Table Management Page 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 41 42 43 44 46 47 48 49 51 54 55 56 57 59 62 65 67 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 All Rights Reserved © 2007.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.4 Menu System Settings 3.15.2.3.1 Connectors 3.1 Main View 1.4 Domain Alarm Synthesis Panel 2.3 Severity Alarm Panel 2.15.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! Blank Page 1 Network Element Overview 1.7 Button Policy 3 Menu Configuration 3.3.2 Main Tool Bar Area 2.2.5.6 Selection Criteria 2.1 PDH-Radio 3.

1 Protection Schema Parameters 7.1 Add a Filter … 4.2 PDH unit Maintenence secondary view 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.2 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area 6.3 Log Browsing 4.1 Alarms tab-panel 6.2 Delete Filters .1 Protection Schema Parameters 7.4 HSB Protection Management 7.2.2.2.3 Restart NE 5.1.7.2.3 LAC Time Out Period 5..2 Settings tab-panel 6.2 Access State 5.1 General 7..3.3.2. 4.2.3 RPS Management 7.7.2 Alarms 4.3.2.2.1 Starting From Scratch 6.4 Load Filters From .7.3 Help Menu 4.2.3 How to Create a New User 3.2.1..2 Commands 7. 4.7.4 Remote Inventory 4.2 EPS Management 7.2.2 User Management 3.2.2.2 Protection Type 6.2.7.3 Save Filters As .1 User Profiles Management 3.1 Requested (Switching OS CT access state) 5.6 Change Password (by the User) 4 Menu Diagnosis 4.4.1 Equipment Type 6.1 Menu Supervision 5.2.7 Menu Profile Management 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Commands 7.2.2 Help Menu 4.4 How to Delete a User 3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 6 .6 Summary Block Diagram View All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 · 1 · 6 4.5 Abnormal Condition List 4.6.2 OS (Switching CT access state OS) 5.2.2.4 SW Licence 6 Tab-panel Equipment 6.1 Event Log Browser 4.1 File Menu 4.Table of Contents [cont.2.3 Remote Inventory tab-panel Blank Page 7 Tab-panel Protection Schemes 7.2..1 File Menu 4.6.1 Main Block diagram view NE operation · Operator interface 4..1 Menu Diagnosis 4. 4.5 Change the Password (by the Administrator) 3.4.2.2 Commands Page 81 82 83 84 86 87 88 89 90 91 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 107 110 111 112 113 114 115 119 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 143 144 145 146 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 Radio unit secondary view 4.6.7 Current Configuration View Blank Page 5 Menu Supervision 5.1 Operation and 4.3.7..2.1 Protection Schema Parameters 7.3.] Switch to notes view! 3.2.2 Filters Menu 4.

2.4.2.2.2.2 Settings 11.2.1.1.1.1 Menu Connections 10 PDH view for PDH domain 10.1 Menu Synchronization 8.1.1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence 11.2 TMN Interface 12.1.1 Mode 11.2 Settings tab-panel (for Ethernet Port#1 to Port#4) 12.2 Port #4 TMN Ethernet Answer the Questions End of Module Page 157 158 159 162 163 164 165 166 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 184 185 186 187 188 189 192 193 194 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 How to read a Power Measurement file 11.1.3 Settings tab-panel (for Ethernet Port#5) 12.2.1 TMN Ethernet port 12.1.4 Tx Mute 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Ethernet Physical Interface 12.2.1.1 Alarm tab-panel 12.2 Settings tab-panel Blank Page 11 Radio view for Radio domain 11.5 Alarm Profile 11.4 Loopback 11.1.2 How to synchronize Blank Page 9 Tab-panel Connections 9.1 PDH Unit configuration 10.3.1 How to activate a loopback 11.1.1.1 Radio domain menu 11.2.2 How to remove a loopback 12 Core-E view for Core-E and Ethernet domain 12.2.2.3 Manual Transmit Power Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Control All 3·1·7 NE operation · Operator interface 11. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 ATPC 11.1 Direction area 11.2.1.2.Table of Contents [cont.2 Channel area 11.3 PPP RF 11.2.3 Measurement 11.] Switch to notes view! 8 Tab-panel Synchronization 8.1 Frequency 11.2 Link Identifier Configuration 11.4.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 7 .1 Alarms tab-panel 10.1.2.2.1.2.1 Core-E domain 12.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 8 .Blank Page 3·1·8 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 9 .2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Network Element Overview 3·1·9 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

the main view screen is shown below. visible when mouse cursor is moved over it. “Show” and “Alarm Monitor” buttons are enabled when a NE is supervised only. and highest severity alarms number.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 10 . Supervision starts as soon as the operator writes an IP address in the specific field and press the “OK” button.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Network Element Overview (NETO) is the starting point of the CT application. NE IP address. This icon also has a specific tooltip. This screen has two specific areas: NE Configuration area: displays NE general information (left side). NETO Main view can also be minimized by using the shrink glass ( The magnifying glass ( ) button in the Menu Bar. Only one NE can be managed in a NETO session. ) button allows to show the normal NETO main view. Status & Alarms area: reports supervision status and alarms (right side). Tray-bar icon is not interactive and does not present any menu or executable command if clicked either with left or right mouse button. that will show: name of application. The alarm severity icon appears in operating system “tray bar”. close to system clock and other system software icons.1 Main View When NETO starts.1 Network Element Overview 1. NETO functions require to know the NE identity by means of the related IP Address. Discovered NEs: in the lower part of the screen is shown the list of the discovered NEs. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 1 · 10 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. With a double click on a row the IP address of the NE in the row automatically is written in the NE Info field.

containing information related to NE addressing. 3 · 1 · 11 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 11 . providing buttons to manage NETO functions.2. 2) NE Description section.1 Network Element Overview 1.2 NE Configuration area The NE configuration area is divided in three sections: 1) NE Info section. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. with information about NE characteristics. 3) Command Buttons section.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

2. Keyboard shortcut “Alt + o” behaves as clicking on “OK” button with mouse. other than clicking on “OK” button.2 NE Configuration area 1. if reachable. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. supervision process will start on specified NE by pressing “enter” (carriage return) key on keyboard. “IP Address” field displays the actual NE IP address used by NETO functions. Whether the IP address is correctly written.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 12 .1 NE Information This area is related to the wanted NE identification.1. 3 · 1 · 12 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 “OK” button will start supervision on specified NE.

2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Please note that changing these labels values will also automatically update NETO window title content: window title will always contain “Site Name” of supervised NE.2 NE Description This area contains some parameters displaying general information about the supervised NE. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 NE Configuration area 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Keyboard shortcut “Alt + a” behaves the same as clicking on “Apply” button with mouse.1. Parameters can be read and modified (and applied to NE using the “Apply” button).2. 3 · 1 · 13 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 13 .

1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 14 . “Alarm Monitor” button starts AM application.2.2 NE Configuration area 1. stopping a possibly running supervision and closing all related applications.3 Command Buttons Command buttons available through NETO are: “Show” button will start WebEML (JUSM/CT) application on a supervised NE.2. Both buttons will be enabled when NE is supervised only.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Keyboard shortcut “Alt + S” behaves as clicking on “Show” button with mouse. Keyboard shortcut “Alt + m” behaves as clicking on “Alarm Monitor” button with mouse. 3 · 1 · 14 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Key-board shortcut “Alt + E” behaves as clicking on “Exit” button with mouse. “Exit” button will close NETO. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 15 . means that such kind of severity contains one alarm at least. Alarm synthesis contains the list of the alarms listed by severity: whether an icon is not gray. “Alarm Monitor” button shown in Figure opens the Alarm Monitor application external tool.2. With respect to “Supervision” status: green colour means that supervision function is ongoing. 3 · 1 · 15 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3 Status & Alarms area Information on supervision status and active alarms are shown in this area.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Round-shaped icons change their colours according to current NETO functions and situation. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Network Element Overview 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. gray icons mean that supervision is not active (to be started). red colour means that NE link does not work.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Network Element Overview 1. Alarm Synthesis area will be updated as well. icon will become red. To start supervision. NETO will open the WebEML (JUSM/CT) for MPR equipment. Clicking on “Show” button. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. a link down or other problems arise during supervision. simply click on “Exit” button (this will also close NETO) or change NE IP address and click “OK” button to start supervision procedure on a different NE (this will stop previous supervision). screen is updated with information retrieved from NE and supervision icon changes its colour from gray to green stating NE is correctly supervised. When a supervision error.2. the operator must specify NE IP address in the “IP Address” field and then simply press “OK” button. 3 · 1 · 16 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. To close an ongoing supervision. If supervision succeeds.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 16 .4 Supervision Function The supervision function allows operator registering a new manager inside NE MIB and performing cyclic (periodic) monitoring on connection.

the operator will be able to open NEs table modal window (see following Figure). “Open” icon allows opening a previously saved file containing a list of NEs.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NETO can manage and organize a list of available NEs by showing operator a table containing such data.1 Network Element Overview 1. “New” icon allows creating a new list. 3 · 1 · 17 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. only when those data will be saved.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 17 . specifying the file name containing its data.2. Using both (New) and (Open) icons. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5 Menu Bar (New) (Open) (Magnifying glass) NETO Main view can also be minimized by using the shrink glass ( ) button. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. This allows the operator to fill the “IP Address” field only with its needed NE. containing all . “New” button.NETO files that it produced with NEs information inside. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 18 . removing a selected NE. To close this window click on “Close” button.2. The operator can have its own NEs lists repository.5 Menu Bar [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 “Get Current” button is used to read information from main NETO view.] NETO List Management 3 · 1 · 18 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. saving table list in a specified file. This happens even though a NE with corresponding IP address is still present in the list. The operator must previously select a valid line in NEs table and then click on “Set Current” button so filling NETO main window data. This operation will automatically close the NE list window but does not start supervision on set NE. “Set Current” button. filling main NETO view IP address with datum from selected NE. This operation will always add a new line in NE list table with all information related to currently supervised NE. adding a new NE from scratch. All data are saved in a custom XML format called “NETO” and this structured file will contain all data shown in Figure related to all NEs added to the list.1 Network Element Overview 1. “Save” button. “Remove” button.

6 Suggested sequence for NETO interface and NE list 1. Click on “Get Current”. 5. The NE table lists are not updated.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 19 .2. Start supervision by clicking “Ok” button.1 Network Element Overview 1. 4. Fill NETO main view “IP Address” field with NE IP address. 2. 3 · 1 · 19 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Open the NEs table (any method. 3. Such data are used for references purposes. but the operator must take care to keep them updated. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. “Save” the list and “Close” the list window. through “New” or “Open” button). if the operator will modify. NE site name site location or even IP address.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This operation will produce a clean and up-to-date NEs table list. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 20 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Blank Page 3 · 1 · 20 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 21 .2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Main View 3 · 1 · 21 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Main view Two Main views are possible according to the MSS version: MSS-8 MSS-4 3 · 1 · 22 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 22 .2 Main View 2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

for Equipment configuration. a new icon could be a check mark ( ) or a switch symbol ( ). As default. Such operation will open a new window containing selected secondary view.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 23 . no tabular element is shown. e. Resource-List Area: may be represented by: Tabular View or Graphical View. : it means the slot is “active”. As shown in Figure.] MSS-8 Domain Alarm Synthesis Panel 3 · 1 · 23 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. The following tab-panels are present: Equipment (to manage the equipment configuration) Protection Schemes (to manage the protection schemes in 1+1 configuration only) Synchronization (to manage the synchronization) Connections (to manage the cross-connections) Each tab-panel consists of three areas: Resource-Tree Area: displays all the available resources of the NE. Figure (Main view) is the entry point of the application and provides basic diagnostic and configuration functions.2 Main View 2. PDH view.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Main View Area manages all domains from which the operator can start. All Rights Reserved © 2007. for Core-E and Ethernet domain (double click on a Core-E unit).1 Main view [cont. no tabular element is shown. Core-E view. many windows placed one upon another. for PDH domain (double click on a PDH unit). Slots schematics will in fact contain usual alarms information with a clarifying coloured icon that reports the same icon visible in tree view.2. Starting from main view. Navigation from main view to multiple main views (related to the equipment components) can be done by simply double-clicking on the component graphical representation.g. As a default. an X-shaped icon ( ) will be added on the left to slots when some cross connections are related to it. Radio view. no entry view is displayed as a consequence of the default behavior of the Resource List area. the operator will also see all slots and ODUs layout. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. It is organized with tab panels. for Radio domain (double click on a Radio unit). Each slot contains schematics of available board (if present) together with status and other details. Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource. As default. Tab-panels Each tab-panel represents a set of functions. Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource. Other icons are: On the right of the unit front panel. Each window is selectable (placing it on top of the others) with a tab shown on the top. : it means the slot is in “stand-by” mode. Resource-Detail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area. Following multiple main views are available: Equipment view.

g. Core-E view. Following multiple main views are available: Equipment view. It is organized with tab panels. Other icons are: On the right of the unit front panel. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Main View Area manages all domains from which the operator can start. Navigation from main view to multiple main views (related to the equipment components) can be done by simply double-clicking on the component graphical representation. Tab-panels Each tab-panel represents a set of functions. As a default.2 Main View 2.] MSS-4 Domain Alarm Synthesis Panel 3 · 1 · 24 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. for Equipment configuration. PDH view. Radio view. Starting from main view. : it means the slot is “active”. Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource. no tabular element is shown. a new icon could be a check mark ( ) or a switch symbol ( ). for Radio domain (double click on a Radio unit). the operator will also see all slots and ODUs layout. Figure (Main view) is the entry point of the application and provides basic diagnostic and configuration functions. Resource-Detail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area. Slots schematics will in fact contain usual alarms information with a clarifying coloured icon that reports the same icon visible in tree view. for PDH domain (double click on a PDH unit). As default. As default. Such operation will open a new window containing selected secondary view. e. Resource-List Area: may be represented by: Tabular View or Graphical View.2. Each slot contains schematics of available board (if present) together with status and other details. The following tab-panels are present: Equipment (to manage the equipment configuration) Protection Schemes (to manage the protection schemes in 1+1 configuration only) Synchronization (to manage the synchronization) Connections (to manage the cross-connections) Each tab-panel consists of three areas: Resource-Tree Area: displays all the available resources of the NE. Each window is selectable (placing it on top of the others) with a tab shown on the top. for Core-E and Ethernet domain (double click on a Core-E unit). All Rights Reserved © 2007. : it means the slot is in “stand-by” mode. no entry view is displayed as a consequence of the default behavior of the Resource List area.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 24 . an X-shaped icon ( ) will be added on the left to slots when some cross connections are related to it.1 Main view [cont. no tabular element is shown. As shown in Figure. many windows placed one upon another.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 25 . Left arrow to previous screen Second button: not operative Right arrow to next screen Block Diagram View: opens the Summary Diagram view Current Configuration View: opens the Current Configuration view Cross-Connections: opens the Cross-Connections menu Segregated Ports: opens the Segregated Ports menu VLAN management: opens the VLAN Management menu Performance Monitoring Tool: opens the Performance Monitoring Tool menu 3 · 1 · 25 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Main View 2.2 Main Tool Bar Area This area contains a selection of handy quick-access buttons for common features.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.

2. Not operative. The figures below describe the different examples. Orange: Major alarm (MAJ). Cyan: Warning alarm (WNG). The meaning of the icons in the Severity alarm synthesis is: 1) CRI . Each alarm severity is represented by an alarm icon situated in the top left hand corner of the view. In the CT these different levels are associated with colors: Red: Critical alarm (CRI).Major (Urgent) alarm Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting. 2) MAJ . Furthermore the shape of the alarm icons in the alarm panel gives an indication of the occurrence of alarms.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 26 . 3 · 1 · 26 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. 4) WNG . An alarm icon with a circle inside it (and a number at the bottom of the icon) indicates that alarms of the number and the type defined by the icon are occurring.Critical alarm Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting (typical: NE isolation).Minor (Not Urgent) alarm Synthesis of alarms for which a deferred intervent can be decided.3 Severity Alarm Panel The CT provides an alarm functionality that informs the operator on the severity of the different alarms in the NE as well as on the number of current alarms. An alarm icon grayed out indicates that spontaneous incoming alarm notification have been inhibited.B. An alarm icon with a rectangle inside it indicates that no alarms of the type defined by the icon are occurring.2 Main View 2. These alarm icons are constantly represented on the different Equipment views (NE view.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 N. There are five different alarm severity levels. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Blue: Indeterminate (IND). Board view or Port view) so that the operator is always aware of the alarms occurring in the system. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Indeterminate alarm Synthesis of alarms not associated with the previous severities. Yellow: Minor alarm (MIN). 3) MIN . NB1.Warning alarm Synthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the network. 5) IND .

4 Domain Alarm Synthesis Panel This area contains the bitmaps (more than one) representing the alarms per domain. Each bitmap indicates the number of alarm occurrences for each domain. 2) EQP – Equipment alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain. 3 · 1 · 27 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 27 .2 Main View 2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3) TRS – Transmission alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Transmission domain. The meaning of the icons in the Domain alarm synthesis area is: 1) EXT .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.External Point (Housekeeping alarm) Not implemented in the current release.2.

5 Management State Control Panel The different management states concerning the NE are also represented via icons located in the top right corner of the equipment views. but the two servers are unreachable. The operator can visualize them with the Diagnosis-> Abnormal condition list menu.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 28 . 6) AC – Abnormal Condition GREEN LED: Normal operating condition.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 N.B. The meaning of the icons in the Management State Control Panel is: 1) Local Access State GREEN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted). 2) COM – NE rechable/unreachable GREEN LED: Identifies the “Enable” operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (link down). 5) NTP Server Status icon.2 Main View 2. 6) AC icon: abnormal condition state: indicates whether some abnormal conditions have been recognized. CYAN LED: Detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. CYAN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not the OS permission to manage the NE (denied). Type: switch forcing. CYAN LED: Protocol enabled and one of the two servers is reachable. RED LED: Identifies the “Disable” operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (link down).: As for the alarm icons. a rectangular management state icon represents the stable state while a circular icon shape represents an unstable management state. 3) SUP – Supervision state GREEN LED: NE is under supervision BROWN LED: NE is not under supervision Used in the OS. 3) SUP icon: Supervision state: indicates whether or not the NE is under OS supervision. 4) OS – OS isolation 5) NTP – Network Timing Protocol BROWN LED: Protocol disabled GREEN LED: Protocol enabled.2. These icons are (from up to down): 1) Icon with a key symbol: Local Access state: indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the OS 2) COM icon: Operational state: indicates whether or not the communication with the OS is established. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. 4) OS icon: OS isolation. 3 · 1 · 28 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

This selection causes the activation of the resource list area. The operator can select resource by clicking with mouse to perform the action dependent on click type. With no symbol. e. node represents a tree leaf. Each resource listed above may be selected by using the mouse by a: Single left click: By a single left click the resource is highlighted. that will display same information as for single click operation.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. every time the operator selects a resource in the resource tree area the corresponding data are displayed in the “Resource list area”. Double left click: Double click operation on resource tree items allows the operator expanding tree structure.g. Third symbol is alarm status of component. Tree structure can be collapsed if symbol is .2 Main View 2. three can be expanded showing its contained lower levels. As soon as a node is expanded. Second symbol is the graphical representation of resource itself.6 Selection Criteria Each tree node consists of possibly three symbols and a label. The first optional symbol indicates structure state: if symbol is .. so activating the display/update of resource list area.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 29 . Resource Detail Area related to the selected item is displayed. another double click on such node would collapse tree structure to its closed view. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. 3 · 1 · 29 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 30 . Cancel this button closes the window without modifying the parameters displayed in the window. OK this button activates the modify and closes the window Close this button closes the window Help this button provides the help management for the functions of the supporting window.2.2 Main View 2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.7 Button Policy The possible buttons for selection are the following: Apply this button activates the “modify”. but it does not close the window. 3 · 1 · 30 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 Menu Configuration 3 · 1 · 31 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 31 .

3 Menu Configuration 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Menu Configuration Menu Configuration is divided in: NE Time Network Configuration Alarm Severities (not implemented in the current release) System Settings Cross Connections VLAN Configuration Profile Management 3 · 1 · 32 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 32 .2.

The NTP Status field shows: status of NTP (enabled/disabled). IP address of the Spare Server (if any). from which you can set the local NE time. All Rights Reserved © 2007. if the protocol has been enabled and configured in Menu Configuration → Network Configuration → NTP Configuration. IP address of the Main Server.2 Menu NE Time 3 · 1 · 33 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 33 . which distributes the time to all the NEs in the network. From the Configuration pull down menu. The NE Time dialogue box displays the current NE time and the current OS time.2. To re-align the NE time to the OS time. The NTP Status field is a read-only field. which replaces the Main Server in case of failure. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: The NTP Status field is not implemented. The Refresh pushbutton causes the refresh of the screen. which shows the configuration regarding the NTP (Network Time Protocol). The dialogue box opens. click on the Set NE Time With OS Time check box and click the Apply pushbutton to validate.3 Menu Configuration 3. The NE local time can be displayed and/or re-aligned to the OS time basis. select the NE Time option.

3 Menu Network Configuration The Network Configuration allows to perform the following operations: Local Configuration: defines the local virtual NE address NTP Configuration (not implemented): Ethernet Configuration (not implemented): IP Configuration which comprises: IP static routing configuration: defines the Host/Network destination address for IP static routing OSPF Area configuration: defines the Open Shortest Path First address IP Point-To-Point Configuration: defines the IP address of the interfaces which use the PPP protocol (not implemented) Routing information: shows a summary of the information relevant to the routing which has been configured.2. 3 · 1 · 34 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 34 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3 Menu Configuration 3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

the dialogue is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogue box and closes it.2 Default mask: 255.3. Default IP address: 10.1. the Local Configuration option. Help button provides some useful information on the dialogue.255.255. from the cascading menu.0. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 35 .3 Menu Network Configuration 3.1 Local Configuration Select the Network Configuration option and then. The dialogue box opens. Close button closes the dialogue.255 3 · 1 · 35 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. which allows to configure the local IP address of the NE. This local IP address is the IP address associated to a virtual interface and to the other interfaces which use the PPP protocol (the TMN-RF channels).2.

3. All Rights Reserved © 2007. which shows the reachability of the NTP servers. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 1 · 36 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 36 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Put a check mark in the NTP protocol field to enable the protocol and write in the Main Server address field the IP address of the server.3 Menu Network Configuration 3. which is in charge to distribute the time to all the NEs in the network. The following information can appear: "Main server reachable" "Spare server reachable" "None servers reachable" "Both servers reachable" Click on Refresh to update the screen.2 NTP Configuration This menu allows to enable the NTP (Network Time Protocol). The Server reachability field is a read-only field.3. In the Spare Server address field write the IP address of the Spare Server. Click on Apply to send to the NE the NTP Configuration. if any.2.

Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.3 IP Static Routing Configuration By selecting IP static routing configuration a dialog-box opens. which allows to configure the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. An open static route is always considered as a preferential path. Point to Point Interface Index for the NMS channels (NMS-RF) 3 · 1 · 37 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. If in the screen the Default Gateway IP Address check box has been selected. Delete button is used to delete the selected page.3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Network to address to a range of IP addresses.3. In the Host or Network Address Choice field select: Host to address to a single IP address.2. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view. By pressing Create pushbutton another screen opens.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 37 . In the Default Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice select: Default Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet interface. The following fields and data are present: IP Address: allows to define the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host IP Mask: allows to define the IP Mask to reach a network Default Gateway IP Address: allows to define the address of the next hop gateway Interface type: allows to use point to point interfaces made available by the NE. If in screen the Point To Point Interface Index check box has been selected another screen opens.3 Menu Network Configuration 3. write in the Default Gateway IP Address field below the relevant IP address. New button is used to insert a new page. The default software uses first the static routes and then the dynamic routes. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 WARNING: No pending (open) static routes are allowed.

3.3 IP Static Routing Configuration [cont.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 38 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] 3 · 1 · 38 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.3.3 Menu Network Configuration 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

the IP mask and select the flag (True/False).3. The following fields and data are present: OSPF Area IP Address OSPF Area Range Mask OSPF Area Stub The fields give a synthetical information that includes all the addresses (specific to a NE and to a Network) in an Area. 3 · 1 · 39 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3. In this new screen write the IP address. All Rights Reserved © 2007. WARNING: When the area is a Stub area. which allows to configure the parameters for OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) Area Table Configuration.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 39 .2. By pressing Create pushbutton a new screen opens. Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data. N.B. Delete button is used to delete the selected page.4 OSPF Area Configuration By selecting OSPF Area Configuration a dialog-box opens. New button is used to insert a new page. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.3 Menu Network Configuration 3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. all the interfaces (NMS and Ethernet) must be defined “Stub". can be created. 3 areas max.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 40 .3.2.3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3 Menu Network Configuration 3.] 3 · 1 · 40 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 OSPF Area Configuration [cont.

5 Routing Information By selecting Routing Information a dialog-box opens: this screen is a read-only screen and displays the routing parameters currently active on the NE.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 41 . The Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 1 · 41 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3.3.3 Menu Network Configuration 3.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The pushbutton Refresh allows to refresh the information shown in the screen.

Default: “Enabled”. 5) Event and Alarm Log As default the Logging is enabled.3 Menu Configuration 3. When the Admission Control is "Disabled".1p). Warning: The disabling of the Admission Control can be done in 1+0 configuration only. this means that for each switch port there is only one queue (FIFO) therefore the first packet that arrives is the first that will be transmitted. the check is performed taking into account the capacity of the 4 QAM modulation scheme for the relevant Channel Spacing. The PC must be configured to get automatically an IP address. To activate the new value. To activate the DHCP server.4 Menu System Settings This menu allows the system configuration. If the QoS is disabled. 6) NE MAC Address This field is a read-only field. The lease time is fixed to 5 minutes.1P user-priority tag. If set to "Disabled" the events are not sent to the Event Log Browser application. DiffServ: each packet is classified based on DSCP field in the IP header to assign the priority. select Enabled and click on Apply. click on Apply. which shows the MAC address of the NE. defined according to the NE Ethernet port IP address: NE Ethernet port IP address plus one. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. all traffic inside the switch has the same priority.2. The following values are available: IEEE std 802. 2) Quality Of Service This field allows to set the suitable Quality Of Service (Disabled/DiffServ/802. The NE configuration tab-panel has 6 fields: Tributary Port Configuration Quality Of Service DHCP Admission Control for Adaptive Modulation Event and Alarm Log NE MAC Address 3 · 1 · 42 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. The DHCP server uses an address pool of only one IP address. otherwise NE Ethernet port IP address minus one. providing the setting of some parameters for the NE setup. the check is performed taking into account the capacity of the highest modulation scheme for the relevant Channel Spacing (64 QAM for 4-16-64 QAM range or 16 QAM for 4-16 QAM range).00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 42 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1) Tributary Port Configuration This field allows to set the suitable impedance of the E1 stream (Unbalanced 75 ohms/Balanced 120 ohm). If the tag is present the correspondent priority is assigned to the packet. 4) Admission Control for Adaptive Modulation The Admission Control for TDM flows (cross-connected to radio direction working in Adaptive Mod-ulation) can be enabled or disabled. if this address is not a direct broadcast address.1p: the packet is examined for the presence of a valid 802. The Ethernet switch provides a Quality of Service mechanism to control all streams. click on Apply. This MAC address must be used in the cross-connection with TDM2Eth profile. When the Admission Control is "Enabled". 3) DHCP The DHCP server configures automatically IP address. IP mask and default gateway of the PC Ethernet interface used to reach the NE. The IP mask is set to the mask of the NE local Ethernet port and the default gateway is set to the NE IP address. To activate the new impedance.

There are a maximum of 6 (PDH/Radio) slots (placed as in the MSS sub-rack). To enable the SFP plug-in go to the Setting tab-panel of the Core-E unit in the Equipment tab-panel.g. icon 4 is not shown.2. ordered from 1 to 5 from left to right. If Ethernet port 4 is set to “TMN”. (e. the 2 protected slots are linked by a dashed line. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Port 4 is visible only when set to “transport” mode.3 Menu Configuration 3. Slots and Ethernet ports (represented by “connectors”) are arranged according to the equipment configuration: There are a maximum of 5 Ethernet ports placed on the bottom. When two units are protected. Port 5 is visible if in the Core-E unit has been installed and enabled the SFP optical plug-in. The Main view is a graphical representation of Cross-connectable slots.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 43 .: Slot#5 RADIO is protected with Slot#6 RADIO).5 Menu Cross Connections 3 · 1 · 43 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: Ethernet port#5 will appear only if the optional optical SFP plug-in has been installed and enabled in the Core-E unit.

in a cross-connection. identifies PDH slots. Blue: a connector that is not able to accept a cross-connection. These connectors have specific icons: identifies Ethernet RJ-45 connector (Ethernet ports). Green: a connector able to accept a cross-connection and already has one active cross-connection at least.1 Connectors The connectors representing the MSS slots are start.3.5. 3 · 1 · 44 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. which is able to accept a crossconnection and has no active cross-connection yet. identifies Radio slots.2.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.and end-point for actual cross-connections.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 44 . By using the mouse drag-and-drop operations the operator can create cross-connections through these points. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The connectors have different colours depending on the associated slot’s state: White: a connector.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

2.5. 3 · 1 · 45 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.5 Menu Cross Connections 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 45 .1 Connectors [cont. their state will change and a line will be drawn between the two cross-connected points.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] After a cross-connection creation between the points.

The operator can directly edit with the mouse this graphical area to visually create and modify crossconnections between available connectors. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3.2.5.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This area contains a panel and various components representing NE cross-connectable slots (or connectors).2 Graphical Area 3 · 1 · 46 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Figure shows an example of ongoing cross-connections configuration.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 46 . Some steps would differ depending on cross-connection types. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

5 Menu Cross Connections 3. any modification performed and not applied will be lost. 3 · 1 · 47 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. if the operation completes without errors the sub-sequent refresh won’t produce any visual change (in other words.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.5. the state of the NE will be consistent with what is shown in the GUI) anyway. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Close: closes the cross-connection view.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 47 . and return to the caller (JusmMainView).2. Help: opens the Help On Line. Refresh: reloads the data from the NE and update the graphical state.3. clicking on Apply button will show a progress dialog. any modification performed and not applied will be lost. After they’ve been applied it will update graphical state by performing a refresh.3 Buttons At the bottom in the menu there are four buttons: Apply: will apply changes (if any) to NE.

5 Menu Cross Connections 3.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007.5. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. To go back to the Cross Connection View press Alt+W.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In the default configuration all the slots and Ethernet ports in Core unit are cross-connectedable each other (all the slots/ports are not segregated).4 Segregated port view From the Cross Connection view by pressing Alt+W the Segregated Port view opens. 3 · 1 · 48 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 48 .

To segregate Slot#7 RADIO from Ethernet ports#2.5.3. click on the relevant square to remove the check mark.2.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. they are segregated). #3. 3 · 1 · 49 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. #4.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 49 . #5 in the Core unit.5 How to segregate slots or ports Double click on a slot icon or an Ethernet port icon and select the slots/ports that can be connected (this means that the not selected slots/ports cannot be connected. Example: with a double click on the icon of Slot#7 RADIO figure opens. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

which now shows (with dashed lines) the segregated ports.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.5 How to segregate slots or ports [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5. 3 · 1 · 50 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.] By clicking OK the Segregated Port view opens.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 With the mouse pointer on a dashed line the following message will appear: "Dashed lines mean that these ports cannot be cross-connected".00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 50 .3.

6 How to create a cross-connection A cross-connection between two points is performed by: Moving the mouse pointer on the source slot. 3 · 1 · 51 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Release the left button. Press the left button and. move mouse pointer onto destination slot.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 51 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. while keeping button pressed.5.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

6 How to create a cross-connection [cont.2. it is possible to see different aspects of configuration created by the operator: Slot#8 PDH is cross-connected to Slot#7 radio. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Slot#4 PDH (blue) could not accept more cross-connections. Slot#8 PDH is cross-connected to Ethernet Port#4. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Looking at figure. Slot#4 PDH is cross-connected to Slot#7 radio. a dialog will appear allowing the operator to setup a cross-connection.5.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 52 . Slot#3 PDH is cross-connected to Ethernet Port#1.3. Radio slots#5 and #6 (green) could accept more cross-connections. Slot#3 PDH (green) could accept more cross-connections.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 If the action involves two cross-connectable slots.] Cross-connections Example 3 · 1 · 52 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Slot#5 RADIO (and Slot#6 RADIO) are cross-connected to Ethernet Port#2.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Each connection line is coloured according to slots types it connects (as shown in figure): PDH-Radio connection: black line. PDH-Eth connection: blue line.6 How to create a cross-connection [cont.3. All Rights Reserved © 2007. These colours will be applied to the graphical area. Radio-Radio connection: red line.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 53 .2. Radio-Eth line: green line.] Legenda PDH-Radio connection PDH-Eth connection Radio-Eth line Actual colored view example 3 · 1 · 53 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.5 Menu Cross Connections 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. when the operator releases the mouse button above cross-connection destination slot. All the lines appears as solid.5.

The “Ok” button will visually save the current modifications (this means that data are graphically saved only. This dialog contains connection information. this states both slots numbers and types. 3 · 1 · 54 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. depending on start. All the dialog boxes have a specific title describing the building cross-connection. Ethernet parameters and so on.5 Menu Cross Connections 3. Dialog boxes can ask for specific Flow Ids through a set of checkboxes. a dialog will appear.7 Creation Dialogs When connecting two linkable slots through a cross-connection. keeping the previous graphical.5. Each cross-connection has different parameters and required data and information will depend on ongoing cross-connecting. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3.and end-point of connection itself. a field to fill-in “external” (incoming) Flow Ids.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 54 . not sent to the NE!) The “Cancel” button will graphically discard ongoing cross-connection. close to the destination point.

2. right click: a dialog with information about all selected tributaries for that connector will appear.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 55 . right click: a dialog with information about selected tributaries for that line will appear.3.5.5 Menu Cross Connections 3. This information can be obtained on both connectors and connection lines. 3 · 1 · 55 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. depending on target and mouse-click type: Connector. The operator can perform different actions in the area.8 Information Dialogs By using the right-click button. the operator can gain information about the graphical representation of the cross-connections. Line.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

which share same source and destination entity.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 56 .5.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.5 Menu Cross Connections 3. two cross-connected slots are visually linked by a line: a line in the context of this application represents a bundle of flows. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.9 Possible Cross-Connections The Cross-connections to be implemented are: PDH-Radio Radio-Radio Radio-Eth PDH-Eth After a cross-connection has been created.3. 3 · 1 · 56 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

as associated in PDH slot.3.10 PDH – Radio By dragging a connection between a PDH slot and a radio slot. PDH-Radio configuration dialog 3 · 1 · 57 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 57 .2.5. the operator will see the configuration dialog in the Figure. All Rights Reserved © 2007.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Configuration parameters will ask to specify Flow ID number.

5 Menu Cross Connections 3. Completed PDH-radio cross-connection 3 · 1 · 58 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. the operator can see a black line describing the PDH-radio cross-connection defined (see Figure).10 PDH – Radio [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.5. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 58 .] Once correctly completed the cross-connection configuration and clicked on “OK” button.

Radio By dragging a connection between two different radio slots.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.11 Radio .00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 59 .3.5. To create other cross-connections drag other lines between the two radio slots and repeat the operations.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. the operator can see the configuration dialog in Figure.2. Radio-Radio configuration dialog 3 · 1 · 59 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 60 .. Based on used input style (ranges or values).3..5 Menu Cross Connections 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. as coming from remote radio signal. .] Configuration parameters will introduce Flow ID number.Radio [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 200. It is not possible to merge the two solutions (ranges and values) by writing [n-m]. 250 in one shot will be created the cross connections with FlowId 10. The operator can use ranges and values. commas can used to separate values. and so on. FlowId 200 and FlowId 250. both included. The operator has to fill in data to complete the crossconnection configuration.11 Radio .[a-b]. For example: by entering in the FlowId field 10-15 in one shot will be created all the cross connections from FlowId 10 to FlowId 15 (10 and 15 included). and a parameter related to profile and TDM Clock Source. To create in one shot several cross-connections the operator can use in the Flow Id field the notation [n-m] to create all Flow IDs from n to m.2. 3 · 1 · 60 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. by entering in the FlowId field 10.5. If the operator wants to specify different Flow Ids grouping them without using ranges. the operator will see two different confirmation dialogs.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 61 .Radio [cont.11 Radio .5. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3.2.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.] Once correctly completed the cross-connection configuration and clicked on “OK” button.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. the operator will see a red line describing the Radio-Radio cross-connection defined (see Figure). Completed Radio-Radio cross-connection 3 · 1 · 61 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Radio-Ethernet configuration dialog (ranges) 3 · 1 · 62 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 62 .2.Ethernet By dragging a connection between a Radio slot and an Ethernet port.12 Radio .5 Menu Cross Connections 3.3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5. the operator will see the configuration dialog in Figure.

the operator will be able to see a green line describing the Radio-Ethernet cross-connection defined. If the operator wants to specify different Flow Ids grouping them without using ranges.2.12 Radio . it can use commas to separate values as shown in figure. Based on used input style (ranges or values). … and so on.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 63 .[a-b]. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Radio-Ethernet configuration dialog (values) 3 · 1 · 63 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.] By using [n-m] the operator will specify adding all Flow IDs from n to m. the operator will see two different confirmation dialogs. Once correctly completed the cross-connection configuration and clicked on “OK” button.3.5. both included.Ethernet [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 It is not possible to merge the two solutions (ranges and values) by writing [n-m].5 Menu Cross Connections 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3.2.12 Radio .Ethernet [cont.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 64 .5.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.] Completed Radio-Ethernet cross-connection 3 · 1 · 64 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

5. and all parameters related to such Flow ID. The operator has to put the correct MAC address to complete the cross-connection configuration.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Configuration parameters will introduce Flow ID number.13 PDH .Ethernet By dragging a connection between a PDH slot and an Ethernet port. PDH-Ethernet configuration dialog 3 · 1 · 65 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. as associated in PDH slot. All Rights Reserved © 2007. the operator can see the configuration dialog in Figure.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 65 .5 Menu Cross Connections 3.3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

the operator can see a green line describing the PDH-Ethernet cross-connection defined (see Figure).Ethernet [cont.2.3.13 PDH .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] Once correctly completed the cross-connection configuration and clicked on “OK” button. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 66 .5. Completed PDH-Ethernet cross-connection 3 · 1 · 66 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.

2.5.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In these types of cross-connections the destination MAC address of the adjacent NE (unicast address in case of unprotected configurations. multicast address in case of protected configurations) must be inserted during the cross-connection creation. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.14 Cross-Connections with TDM2Eth Profile No protection 1+1 radio protection between NE B and C 3 · 1 · 67 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. In the figures of the current and next slide 3 examples are given.3.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 67 .

] 1+1 EPS protection in NE A 3 · 1 · 68 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.5. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 68 .2.14 Cross-Connections with TDM2Eth Profile [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.

3.14 Cross-Connections with TDM2Eth Profile [cont. 3 · 1 · 69 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 69 .] To assign the multicast MAC address of a NE start from the unicast MAC address and change a digit in the first pair of digits in order to generate an odd binary number: example change the first pair of the address from 00 to 01.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5 Menu Cross Connections 3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: The unicast MAC address of the NE is shown in the System Settings menu (Bridge Address).5. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

5 Menu Cross Connections 3.5.15 How to modify a cross-connection An existing cross-connection can be modified by double-clicking with the left mouse button on its symbolic line.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 70 .3. Now from the screen you have to delete the cross-connections by removing the check mark from the relevant Flow Id box and create again a new cross-connections. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 1 · 70 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

15. but with some differences in allowed actions: Previously assigned tributaries (703 in the example) are active and selected.2.1 PDH-Radio 3 · 1 · 71 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.5. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5. 709 and others) are not active and not selected.15 How to modify a cross-connection 3. Tributaries assigned to another cross-connection (706.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 71 .3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In figure the operator is modifying a previously created cross-connection (in this case Slot#7 PDH and Slot#5 radio): this action brings up a dialog almost like the creation one. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

the dialog window shown in Figure will appear.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 72 .5.15 How to modify a cross-connection 3. With a double click with the mouse on the connection line.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The operator can click on a specific (red) line in order to modify connection parameters. Remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection. All Rights Reserved © 2007.3.2 Radio-Radio 3 · 1 · 72 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5.2.15.

the dialog window shown in Figure can be managed by the operator.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 73 .3.5.2. With a double click with the mouse on the connection line.3 Radio-Ethernet 3 · 1 · 73 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.15 How to modify a cross-connection 3.15. Remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection.5.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The operator can click on specific (green) line in order to modify connection parameters. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

2.5.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The operator can click on specific (blue) line in order to modify connection parameters. the dialog window shown in Figure can be managed by the operator. Remove the check mark and create again a cross-connection.4 PDH-Ethernet 3 · 1 · 74 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. With a double click with the mouse on the connection line.5. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.15 How to modify a cross-connection 3.3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 74 .15.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 75 .3 Menu Configuration 3.2.1D (MAC Address Bridge) 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge) 3 · 1 · 75 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.6 Menu VLAN Configuration Two different ways to manage the Ethernet traffic are allowed: 802.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

6. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 When the NE is configured in this mode (default configuration).3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 76 .6 Menu VLAN Configuration 3.2. The packets having a VLAN ID already used for a TDM flow are accepted. The packets from the user Ethernet ports having the VLAN ID out the allowed range (0 and 2-4080) are dropped.1D 3 · 1 · 76 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. the Ethernet traffic is switched according to the destination MAC address without looking the VLAN. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 802.

the management of Ethernet traffic looking the VLAN is enabled.2 802.6. In this modality.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 When the NE is configured in this mode.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 77 . All Rights Reserved © 2007.3.1Q 3 · 1 · 77 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.6 Menu VLAN Configuration 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. one VLAN will be assigned to all Ethernet frames inside the MPR network.2.

All Rights Reserved © 2007. Before applying this deletion.6. It is possible to remove a VLAN-ID from the VLAN-ID table even if this VLAN-ID has been already configured on one or more user ports as Port VLAN to be added in ingress to untagged frames.2. Refresh: the VLAN table is updated.2. VLAN-ID 1 is shown to the operator. 3 · 1 · 78 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Delete: to delete a VLAN-ID.1 VLAN 1 Management VLAN-ID 1 is automatically defined by the NE when the 802. The file can be stored in the PC to be read later.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 78 .1Q bridge type is selected. Export: to export the VLAN configuration in a file with extension CSV. but it cannot be neither changed nor deleted.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 New: to create a new VLAN (refer to VLAN table management) Edit: to change the parameters of a VLAN (VLAN name. which name corresponds (totally or partially) to the name written in the "Filter by Name" box. Filter: by inserting a name in the "Filter by Name" box and by clicking on Filter will be displayed in the table only the VLAN.2 802. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.6. As consequence. the VLAN-ID=1 and PRI=0 are added to the untagged frames received on this port.3. VLAN member ports. Clear Filter: by clicking this button all the VLAN created in VLAN table will again appear.1Q 3. All the user Ethernet ports (enabled and disabled) and all the radio ports are members of the VLAN 1. In egress VLAN-ID 1 is always removed from all the ports. VLAN untagged ports in egress). a confirmation of the operation is shown to the operator.

: There is no check on unambiguity name. This means that a disabled port can be configured as a member of a VLAN and a port already member of a VLAN can be disabled continuing to be a member of the same VLAN. N. among the ports belonging to this VLAN (members).2 802. which means all the frames are transmitted with Tag.1Q 3. are manageable. Both enabled and disabled user Ethernet ports (radio ports when declared are implicitly enabled) can be member of a VLAN. The VLAN cannot be removed from the radio ports (with the exception of the VLAN 1).6. for the VLAN IDs defined. enabled and disabled.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 79 .6. all the ports are members and the Untag flag is set to “False”.4080. 3) VLAN Ports field: Select the ports members of this VLAN by putting a check mark on the relevant check box. TDM2ETH) cannot be used. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3. the untagged ports (in egress the VLAN will be removed from the frames).1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1) VLAN ID field: Enter the VLAN ID (the configurable values must be in the range 2 . TDM2TDM. All Rights Reserved © 2007.: The VLAN-ID values allowed are in the range 2 . 2) VLAN Name field: Enter the VLAN Name: a text string of up to 32 characters. Only the user Ethernet ports.B. All the user Ethernet ports and all the Radio directions can be considered.: The VLAN IDs already defined to cross-connect internal flows (i.B.2 VLAN Table Management To create a VLAN follow the following instructions.B. N.4080) N. 3 · 1 · 79 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. 4) Untagged Ports field: Select.2. By default. the packet is dropped.: Tagged frames If one tagged packet with VLAN-ID X is received on a port which is not member of the VLAN-ID X.e. N.B.2.

2 VLAN Table Management [cont.3. on which there is at least one port member of a VLAN.6.2. is declared by the operator as no more expected in the current slot position. three VLANs have been created (VLAN 2. as example. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 802.6. asking confirmation of the operation. the port(s) are automatically removed by the NE from the list of ports member of the VLAN and from the list of the untagged ports in egress.B.1Q 3. If confirmed.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 80 . All Rights Reserved © 2007.] In the following figure.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 N.: When a board. the management system advises the operator that there are ports on the board member of a VLAN.2. 3 and 4). 3 · 1 · 80 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

numeric and special characters). Username length: the length must be not longer than 20 characters. an error message will be displayed. All Rights Reserved © 2007. According to the operator authentication (correct couple username/password) managed by the NE. Password composition: the password can include full ASCII characters set (UPPER/lower case.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 81 . while the Login window is still open for a new attempt. By clicking on the Cancel button. After 3 consecutive failed attempts the login procedure is closed and JUSM does not start. the login procedure is stopped and the JUSM does not start. Moreover the password length must be not longer than 20 characters. WARNING: The NE rejects usernames and passwords that do not meet the following rules: Password length: the length must be not less than eight (8) characters under any circumstances.2. On the contrary if the user name and password are correct. the parameters are sent to NE. the operator will be authorized or not to continue. the following Dialog screen is displayed after the window with JUSM start-up message and before the window with loading bar indicating JUSM start-up progress.7 Menu Profile Management After the Start Supervision. 3 · 1 · 81 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3 Menu Configuration 3. each time the operator performs the Show Equipment action. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Login window The operator has to insert the user name and related password: by clicking on the Apply button. The default Password is “adminadmin”.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The default Operator Name is “initial”. JUSM will be started and the operator will be allowed to perform the actions according to the right related to his profile. If the login parameters are not correct.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. the operator can perform some actions on the profiles.7.7 Menu Profile Management 3.1 User Profiles Management If the operator right allows the profiles management.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 82 . the Profiles Management menu displays two items: Users Management Change Password These items will be enabled according to the right of user profile recognised at login. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. 3 · 1 · 82 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Under Configuration menu.3.

3. The operator can perform the following actions: Create a new User by clicking on the Create button.2.2 User Management By clicking on Users Management the window displayed in the Figure appears.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 83 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 By clicking on the Cancel button the Profiles Management window closes. Change PW (by Administrator) by clicking on the Change PW button.7 Menu Profile Management 3. After the selection of a user in the table. All Rights Reserved © 2007. By clicking on the Help button the help browser will display the help-on-line pages dedicated to this function. it’s possible: Delete an existing User (the Admin user cannot be deleted) by clicking on the Delete button. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.7. 3 · 1 · 83 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

3 · 1 · 84 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3.2.7 Menu Profile Management 3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. the following window appears and allows the user Administrator to create a new user.7.3 How to Create a New User By clicking on the Create button.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 84 .

Profile: the specific profile to be assigned to the new User. Operator profile: Full reading access to NE parameters. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Also the management of user accounts is allowed (create/delete user accounts and change of all passwords). only for own password Viewer: only to explore the NE Supported operations by the profiles: Administrator profile: All the NE parameters are accessible both in writing and reading mode. Confirm Password: again the specific password to be assigned for confirmation and validation.7. JUSM will display the specific message and allows the operator to correct them. could change own password CraftPerson: person in charge for installation and the maintenance at radio site. the action will be failed). after to have automatically closed the window.2. but cannot manage the user accounts Viewer profile: This operator can only read and can change his own password. Password: the specific password to be assigned to the new User. a message with result of the action will be displayed. 5.7 Menu Profile Management 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. If all parameters are correct. 4. the Create User window closes and no action will be performed. not at radio side.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 85 .3 How to Create a New User [cont. AdminPassword: the password of Administrator for confirmation and validation.] The operator has to insert the parameters to define the new user and his profile rights: 1. 3 · 1 · 85 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. 3.3. By clicking on Cancel button. full access to NE but not for security parameters. By clicking on Apply button. at first JUSM performs a syntax check of each field: if there are some errors.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The supported profiles are: Administrator: full access also for security parameters Operator: person in charge to operate at network level. all parameters are sent to NE. For writing mode the following parameters are allowed to change: ATPC configuration (not implemented) Performance Monitoring management start/stop CD threshold tables configuration reset archiving (only for NMS system) CraftPerson profile: This operator has the same priviledges of the Administrator. UserName: the specific name to be assigned to the new User (if it exists. 2. dangerous operations that require NE reconfiguration at radio site are not permitted including backup/restore and restart NE features.

a message with the result action will be displayed after to have closed automatically the window above.4 How to Delete a User After the selection of a User in the Profile Table. Delete user confirmation Confirm Administrator Password to Delete a User All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 · 1 · 86 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. then the window to confirm the administrator password will be displayed (Figure “Confirm Administrator Password to Delete a User”).7 Menu Profile Management 3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 86 . by clicking on the Delete button.7. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. If the operator clicks on Cancel button the window will closes and no action is performed.1 Operation and Maintenence By clicking on the Apply button.3. at first a confirmation dialog (Figure “Delete user confirmation”) will be displayed.

all parameters are sent to NE.7 Menu Profile Management 3. All Rights Reserved © 2007. The following dialog box is displayed: Change Password of User by Admin The admin has to insert his password and the new password for selected user in the two text fields. 3 · 1 · 87 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. If all parameters are correct. at first JUSM performs a syntax check of each field: if there are some errors.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 87 . a message with result of the action will be displayed.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 By clicking on Apply button.7.3. JUSM will display the specific message and allows the operator to correct them. By clicking on Cancel button. after to have automatically closed the window. the window will be closed.5 Change the Password (by the Administrator) The Administrator User can change the password of another user: select the user in the Profile Table and then click on Change PW button.2.

If all parameters are correct. 3 · 1 · 88 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3.2. a message with result of the action will be displayed. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.7 Menu Profile Management 3.7.6 Change Password (by the User) If the operator wants to change his password. The following dialog will be displayed: Change User Password The operator has to insert the current password and the new password in the two text fields. he has to select the Change Password menu item. JUSM will display the specific message and allows the operator to correct them.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 By clicking on Apply button. the window closes. By clicking on Cancel button. all parameters will be sent to NE. at first JUSM performs a syntax check of each field: if there are some errors. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 88 . after to have automatically closed the window.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.4 Menu Diagnosis 3 · 1 · 89 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 89 .

4 Menu Diagnosis 4.2.1 Menu Diagnosis Menu Diagnosis is divided in: Alarms Log Browsing Remote Inventory Abnormal Condition List Summary Block Diagram View Current Configuration View 3 · 1 · 90 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 90 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Alarms Monitor is an application which allows to display and store the alarms of all the NEs requiring it. Alarms Monitor can be also started by clicking on the Alarms Monitor button on Neto. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 91 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Alarms 3 · 1 · 91 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 Menu Diagnosis 4.

Each global list has some default filters (5 filters for the CURRENT_ALARM list and 8 filters for the ALARM_LOG list). below each NE.e.4 Menu Diagnosis 4. which are no longer active (this filter is available within the list ALARM_LOG only).1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: When an alarm is no longer active it disappears from the two global lists and it is displayed in the ALARM_LOG list as a cleared alarm. as follows: 1) CRI contains all the alarms having a CRITICAL severity 2) MAJ contains all the alarms having a MAJOR severity 3) MIN contains all the alarms having a MINOR severity 4) WRG contains all the alarms having a WARNING severity 5) IND contains all the alarms having an INDETERMINATE severity 6) CLR contains all the alarms which are in the CLEARED state.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 92 . two global lists of alarms are displayed: CURRENT_ALARM shows all the equipment alarms currently present.] On the left side of the application. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. 3 · 1 · 92 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. that is. ALARM_LOG shows all the equipment alarms currently present and the history of the alarms (i.2 Alarms [cont. For each list and for each filter. These two lists can be filtered using customized filters provided by means of the menu Filters → Add a Filter. the number of active alarms is shown inside brackets. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. cleared alarms).

2. At the top right.2 Alarms [cont. The alarms have a different color according to their severity and their state. only the tab-panels of the two global lists are displayed on the right part of the window.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: when the application is opened for the first time. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. the field Synthesis shows the number of active alarms for any severity.4 Menu Diagnosis 4. Red: CRITICAL alarm Brown: MAJOR alarm Yellow: MINOR alarm Blue: WARNIG alarm White: INDETERMINATE alarm (Note that the equipment has no alarm having such severity) Green: CLEARED alarm (alarm no longer active). 3 · 1 · 93 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 93 .] Single clicking on a filter or on a global list on the left part of the screen shows up on the right side the relevant tab panel with all the alarms.

2. EQUIPMENT: inside alarm of the equipment).1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Severity: alarm severity. Probable cause: name of the probable cause of the alarm. Specific problem: for some alarms. each alarm is provided with the information below. Alarm Type: alarm class (TRS = Transmission Alarm – alarm not created inside the equipment. it states the specific threshold exceeded) 3 · 1 · 94 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Time & Date: date and time of the alarm. when a threshold alarm is raised.] Within the tab-panel. Add Text: not available. Friendly Name: object of the equipment where the alarm occurred.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 94 . The format of date and time is yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.4 Menu Diagnosis 4. but generated by a connected equipment or due to transmission/propagation problems. additional information is provided about the involved resource (for instance.2 Alarms [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

2 Alarms [cont. The “Print Dialog” box is shown to choose the printer and set Print range and Copies number.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. to export alarms to a file.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 95 . 3 · 1 · 95 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Export Alarm: to create a file containing alarms data. Generated file formats are CSV. Alarms have to be selected by means of the menu Select All. e.g. Note: this option is available in the CURRENT_ALARM global list and in the relevant filters only.] Right-clicking on an alarm row opens the menu shown in the following figure.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Navigate to USM: to navigate to the object involved with the selected alarm and to open the relevant window. HTML and XML. Select: to select all the alarm of the list (All) or to select none (None) for further use. Print current view: it is possible to print the list of the alarms.4 Menu Diagnosis 4.

2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 Menu Diagnosis 4.] The Menu Bar provides the following menus: File Filters Help 3 · 1 · 96 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 Alarms [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 96 .

Select the global list of a specific NE. Load Log to selected NE By means of this menu it is possible to display the global list of a certain NE previously saved. HTML or HML) and then assign the name of the file. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 97 . choose the file format (CSV.4. select "Export Alarms" menu.1 File Menu Save Log for selected NE This menu allows to save a file with one of the two global lists of each NE.2.2.2 Alarms 4. Select the log. 3 · 1 · 97 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. open the Save History menu for the selected NE and enter filename and relevant directory in the opening window.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Export Alarms This menu allows to save a file with the alarms of the selected Log.

2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 98 .2.2 Alarms 4.2 Filters Menu The Menu Filters provides the following menus: Add a Filter … Delete Filters … Save Filters As … Load Filters From … 3 · 1 · 98 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4.

Resource field Put a check mark on the Resource box and write the object name the alarms of which have to be filtered (if required). (Clicking on the Cancel pushbutton clears the filter configuration).2.2. The filter can be applied to all the NEs by selecting All or it can be applied to one or more NEs by selecting one or more NEs using the mouse. The created filter appears on the left side of the application.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Filter Name field Enter the filter name in the Filter Name field. 3 · 1 · 99 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Event Time field Select Event Time and then enter the starting date (From) and the ending date (To) to filter the alarms created during that specific time frame only. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Add a Filter … This menus allows to create customized logs adding some new specific filters. Alarm Type field Select Alarm Type to create a filter for the selected type of alarm: TRS = Transmission Alarm EQUIPMENT = Equipment alarm Perceived severity field Select Perceived severity and then one or more severity levels and/or Cleared state to filter the alarm having the selected severity levels.2 Filters Menu 4. Scope field Select APT (Current) to create a filter showing the current alarms only or select Log to create a filter for current and cleared alarms. The filters can be created selecting one of the following fields (or more).4. The windows which opens is shown below. To save the created filter click on the Done pushbutton. Probable Cause field Select Probable Cause and the choose a specific alarm (one or more) to filter these particular alarms only. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 99 .2.

select a specific filter (or more filters) in the Filters column and then click on the Done Pushbutton. When this menu is selected. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Delete Filters .2. 3 · 1 · 100 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 100 .. All Rights Reserved © 2007. the window shown below opens.4.2. Default filters cannot be canceled.. Clicking on the Cancel pushbutton all the selections are cleared.2.2. Select one specific NE (or more NEs) in the Scope column.2 Filters Menu 4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 By means of this menu the filters previously created can be canceled.

2. select the Folder where to save the file relevant to filter and then click on the Done Pushbutton. A default filter.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 101 . All Rights Reserved © 2007.. or a filter previously created by means of the Add a filter … menu can be saved to be used for some other LCTs. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4.. 3 · 1 · 101 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 Filters Menu 4.2.2. enter the filter name in the Name field.3 Save Filters As . Clicking on the Cancel pushbutton all the selections are cleared.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Select in the Scope and Filters columns a specific filter to be saved.

2. A filter previously saved can be loaded on the LCT by means of the following menu.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 102 .4 Load Filters From .2..2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. the inserted characters are attached before the names of the Loaded Filters. For instance entering <Vim>.2 Filters Menu 4.2. the names of the filters change from APT to VimAPT. 3 · 1 · 102 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Click on Browse to navigate and then choose the filter file to be loaded. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.. Entering some characters in the Filters Prefix field and then clicking on the Done pushbutton. The Scope and the Loaded Filters columns will show respectively the NE list and the filters list made available by the selected file.4.

3 Help Menu This menu shows the Product Version.2. 3 · 1 · 103 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.4.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 103 .2 Alarms 4.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The Event Log option opens the Event Log browser application.4 Menu Diagnosis 4.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 104 .2. The Software Trace Log option is reserved to the Alcatel-Lucent technicians.3 Log Browsing In the Diagnosis pull-down menu select the Log Browsing option.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 1 · 104 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. The Alarm Log option is not available in the current release.

The format is week day/month/day hh:mm:ss. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The following information is provided for each event: Time: date and time of occurrence of the event.3 Log Browsing 4.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Explanation: a statement built with the event log data to explain what the event represents. Notification ID: a unique identifier for the event.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 105 .4. 3 · 1 · 105 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. An event is meant to be: a configuration change a change of the value of an attribute an automatic switchover a manual operation carried out by the operator.1 Event Log Browser Event Log Browser is an application which allows to display all the events occurred in the NE.3. Reference Time (CEST) year.

4.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 106 .1 Event Log Browser [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.3 Log Browsing 4.] The Menu Bar provides the following menus: File Help 3 · 1 · 106 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 107 .3.1.2.1 File Menu The Menu File makes available the following menus: Refresh Tables Export Print Exit Refresh Tables By means of this menu the event log is refreshed. 3 · 1 · 107 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. A refresh may be executed as well clicking on the relevant pushbutton below the menu bar.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Event Log Browser 4.3.

1.1 Event Log Browser 4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. The Export may be executed as well clicking on the relevant pushbutton below the menu bar.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 108 . The file can store all the events (All entries) or only those selected by means of the pointer of the mouse (Selection). The file can have the HTML.3.1 File Menu [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3. 3 · 1 · 108 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4. PDF or XML format.2. CSV.] Export This menu allows to export the alarm table as a file.

1 File Menu [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1.4.3.2. 3 · 1 · 109 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Event Log Browser 4.3. The print may be executed as well clicking on the relevant pushbutton below the menu bar.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 109 . The Print Dialog box shows up allowing to choose the printer and set print range and number of copies. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] Print It is possible to print the event list (all or just the selected ones).

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4.2.1.3.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 110 .2 Help Menu This menu shows the Product Version. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3.1 Event Log Browser 4. 3 · 1 · 110 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

3 · 1 · 111 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 Menu Diagnosis 4.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 111 . which shows all the information on the equipment.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4 Remote Inventory This screen is a read-only screen.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

RPS.e.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. manual Tx mute).1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The list of the events which cause an abnormal condition: Forced switch (EPS. 3 · 1 · 112 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. loopbacks. TPS) Lockout (EPS. automatic Tx mute) or as consequence of management systems operation (i. detected automatically (i. An abnormal condition is generated each time a non usual condition is present in the NE. TPS) Loopback activation Local radio Tx mute (manual) Adaptive Modulation in normal mode All Rights Reserved © 2007.e.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 112 . force switching.4 Menu Diagnosis 4. RPS.5 Abnormal Condition List The Abnormal Condition List option in the Diagnosis menu displays all the abnormal conditions currently active in the NE.

4 Menu Diagnosis 4.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 1 · 113 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 113 .6 Summary Block Diagram View The “Summary Block Diagram View” of the Diagnosis menu displays a global logical view (strictly related to the physical implementation) highlighting a synthesis of all the alarms and statuses present in the system.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. and re-opening all previously opened secondary windows. it is possible to navigate to the Ethernet port view in the Core-E unit. it means that the loopback is active or the Perfomance monitoring/Ethernet Counters have been activated.4. updating the main view one.1 Main Block diagram view The Figure shows an example of the Main block diagram view. with updated content views.6. bold light green lines update according to the actually NE working way.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 114 . by clicking on the NMS Interfaces box. it is possible to navigate to the Abnormal Condition List menu. alarm icons update as well. The “Refresh” button will close all secondary windows. with the protection schemes and with the cross-connections implemented between the different units and the different Ethernet ports. by clicking on a PDH slot icon in the Cross Connection Matrix. If these symbols are green. it is possible to navigate to the secondary view for the PDH unit.6 Summary Block Diagram View 4. The green line is the current active path. it is possible to navigate to the secondary view for the Radio unit. 3 · 1 · 114 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. By clicking on an object it s possible to navigate to specific views. if any. According to following figures. In detail: by clicking on the Abnormal Condition List box. by clicking on the Ethernet icon in the Cross Connection Matrix. All diagrams are automatically refreshed. In the Main view the current configuration of the PNU is shown. by clicking on a Radio slot icon in the Cross Connection Matrix. it is possible to navigate to the NMS view in the Core-E unit.2. with the equipped units (PDH or Radio). On the RADIO slot icon there is the symbol because on this unit a loopback can be activated.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Each block has its Alarm indicator (coloured ball icon) that shows the alarm status (different colors according to the alarm severity). All Rights Reserved © 2007. the symbol because it is also possible to activate a Performance monitoring and the symbol because it is possible to activate the Ethernet traffic counters.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 1+0 block diagram (PDH unit) (without Core-E protection) 3 · 1 · 115 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4.6 Summary Block Diagram View 4. describing the actual NE status and working mode. different diagrams are shown to the operator.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 115 .6.2 PDH unit secondary view Depending on the configuration.2.

4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.6 Summary Block Diagram View 4.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 116 .] 1+0 block diagram (PDH unit) (with Core-E protection) 3 · 1 · 116 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.6.2 PDH unit secondary view [cont.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

4.] 1+1 block diagram (PDH units) (without Core-E protection) 3 · 1 · 117 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 117 .6 Summary Block Diagram View 4.2 PDH unit secondary view [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.6.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 118 .4.2 PDH unit secondary view [cont.6.6 Summary Block Diagram View 4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] 1+1 block diagram (PDH units) (with Core-E protection) 3 · 1 · 118 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Loopback icons ( ) are shown in green colour ( ) whenever a loopback is active. ) the navigation to the Performance Monitoring tool Performance monitoring icons ( ) are shown in green whenever a PM is active. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Ethernet Counters icon ( ) is shown in green whenever the counter has been activated. Switch block (“EPS Core”.2.6 Summary Block Diagram View 4. …) are updated according to the signal path.4.6. describing the actual NE status and working mode.3 Radio unit secondary view Depending on the configuration. different diagrams are shown to the operator. on the PM icon or on the Ethernet Counters icon the navigation to the relevant menus starts.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 119 . By clicking on the Loopback icon. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. “RPS Rx”. “RPS TX”. By clicking on the Performance Monitoring icon ( starts. 1+0 block diagram (Radio unit) (without Core-E protection) 3 · 1 · 119 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. following light green-coloured line.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 Radio unit secondary view [cont.] 1+0 block diagram (Radio unit) (with Core-E protection) 3 · 1 · 120 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 120 .6.2.6 Summary Block Diagram View 4.4.

4.2.3 Radio unit secondary view [cont.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 121 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.6.6 Summary Block Diagram View 4.] 1+1 FD block diagram (Radio units) (without Core-E protection) 3 · 1 · 121 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 122 .2.6 Summary Block Diagram View 4.4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] 1+1 FD block diagram (Radio units) (with Core-E protection) 3 · 1 · 122 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.6.3 Radio unit secondary view [cont.

] 1+1 Hot Standby block diagram (Radio units) (without Core-E protection) 3 · 1 · 123 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.6 Summary Block Diagram View 4.3 Radio unit secondary view [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.6. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 123 .

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 124 .3 Radio unit secondary view [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4.2.6 Summary Block Diagram View 4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] 1+1 Hot Standby block diagram (Radio units) (with Core-E protection) 3 · 1 · 124 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.6.

7 Current Configuration View 3 · 1 · 125 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This view is a read-only screen.4 Menu Diagnosis 4.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 125 . All Rights Reserved © 2007. which shows the current configuration of the NE.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 126 .Blank Page 3 · 1 · 126 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.5 Menu Supervision 3 · 1 · 127 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 127 .

5 Menu Supervision 5.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 128 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Menu Supervision Menu Supervision is divided in: Access State Restart NE MIB Management (not implemented in the current release) SW Licence 3 · 1 · 128 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

If the LAC is “granted”. These services include: Alarm reception and processing. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. In the view. it means that the CT has requested a permission from the OS and is waiting for a replay. Performance processing. If the LAC is “requested”. To control the competition of the OS and the CT. However. the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape. the icon with a key symbol has a rectangular shape. 3 · 1 · 129 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. In the view.2 Access State The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 129 . The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views.5 Menu Supervision 5. it means that the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify the NE configuration (it can only «read»). If the LAC is “access denied”. it means that the CT is allowed to manage the NE. Switching back to the OS access state.2. a Local Access Control (LAC) is available.

1 Requested (Switching OS CT access state) Select the Supervision pull down menu. it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can be managed by a Craft Terminal.2. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading menu. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5.2 Access State 5.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. If the OS does not answer in a predefined time. 3 · 1 · 130 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 130 .

2. The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the OS.B.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 131 . The NE is now managed by the OS. Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted).2 OS (Switching CT access state OS) Select the Supervision pull down menu. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.B. the OS automatically recovers the communication and forces the state existing before the loss of communication (therefore. When the communication with the NE is lost. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 Access State 5. 3 · 1 · 131 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. N.2. Then from the Access State cascading menu select the OS option.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 N. Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE.5.

2 Access State 5.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 132 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 LAC Time Out Period When the CT operator asks to the OS to access to the NE (by pressing “Requested”) after the time set in this screen. 3 · 1 · 132 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. the CT gets the control and enters in the state “LAC Requested” only if OS cannot reach the NE.2. With the Refresh button it is possible to see the time which has been previously set.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5.

5 Menu Supervision 5. A dialogue box opens.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 133 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 WARNING: After the activation of the Restart NE Command (or after the pressing of the HW reset pushbutton) the supervision of the local NE and the remote NEs is lost. 3 · 1 · 133 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. select the Restart NE option.3 Restart NE The Restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions. Click the Yes button to confirm the restart NE operation Click the No button to abort the restart NE operation. From the Supervision cascading menu.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 134 .5 Menu Supervision 5.4 SW Licence In this screen the following fields are present. RMU Serial Number: in this read-only field appears the Serial Number of the Flash Card. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. License String: in this read-only field appears the type of the license written in the Flash Card. 3 · 1 · 134 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Refresh button activates a new reading of the read-only fields. To upgrade the license copy in this field the code of the new license and click on Apply. License Key: this field is used to upgrade the license.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 135 .2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.6 Tab-panel Equipment 3 · 1 · 135 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Starting From Scratch When the equipment configuration panel is open starting from a scratched NE. Click on Settings panel. the operator will see the panel in figure below. Now in the MSS will appear the new card in the slot. 3 · 1 · 136 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.6 Tab-panel Equipment 6.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To configure a card: Select a slot.2. The Resource Tree area contains a list of empty slots that have to be configured. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Select the correct type of unit.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 136 . Icon is used to identify an empty slot. Click on Apply.

6 Tab-panel Equipment 6. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 137 .2 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area For every unit in the MSS there are 3 tab-panels: Alarms Settings Remote Inventory 3 · 1 · 137 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

6. 3 · 1 · 138 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Alarms tab-panel The Alarms tab panel provides the fault management. which checks the current state of alarms related to the selected object.2 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area 6.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 138 .2. but only rows related to the active alarms are highlighted. When the alarm disappears it is automatically cleared in the screen. The alarm tab panel has one row for each possible alarm.2. For every alarm the following information is given: Severity: the severity associated to the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile Event Time: the time of the generation of the alarm Entity: the entity involved in the alarm Probable Cause: the probable cause of the alarm Managed Object Class: the class of the alarm. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 139 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 Settings tab-panel In the Setting tab-panel the following fields are present: Equipment Type Protection Type Configuration Alarm Profile (not implemented) 3 · 1 · 139 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area 6.6.2.2.

1 Equipment Type The operator must set for all the slots the expected equipment type.2. Select the equipment type and click Apply. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.2. The Setting tab-panel of the Core-E unit is shown here below. 3 · 1 · 140 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. The list box shows the expected equipment type (P32E1DS1 or MD300) for slot 3 to 8.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 140 . Click on Apply on the Plug-in Type field to enable the SFP optional optical plug-in.2 Settings tab-panel 6.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.6. if the plug-in has been installed in the Core-E unit.2.

allowed protection types are “1+0”.2 Protection Type The operator can configure the NE protection type. All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 1 · 141 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. If operator selects a protection type different from received one.2. Select the Protection type and click on Apply.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 141 . If it is configured as MD300.2. apply button is disabled. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. After the equipment selection. This function is shown selecting slots 3 to 8 only.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 If the operator selects a protection type equal to received one. If slot is in protection mode (received protection type different from “1+0”): apply button related to expected-equipment is disabled (equipment changing is allowed in “1+0” configuration only).2. allowed protection types are “1+0” and “1+1 EPS”. apply button is enabled. For slots 1 and 2 (reserved to Main and Spare Core-E units) the protection type is automatically configured by the system.6.2. “1+1 HSB” and “1+1 FD”. protection type list box is filled with allowed protection types list (the content depends on expected equipment configured): If it is configured as P32E1DS1.2 Settings tab-panel 6.

Check mark icon ( ) denotes “active” board while switch one ( ) represents “stand-by” board.2.2. In this situation. An error message will be shown if the operator will try to perform such operations.2. this means pair (row) is protected.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 142 .2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.6. All Rights Reserved © 2007.] 3 · 1 · 142 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. PDH board cannot be removed as well when Flow IDs are configured. Same behaviour occurs when X-shaped icon ( ).2 Settings tab-panel 6. representing cross-connections. appears.2 Protection Type [cont. the couple is considered as if it is one board and each single board cannot be removed/un-configured unless removing protection. while same-pair (same-row) one shows switch symbol ( ).1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 When a board shows the check mark ( ) icon.

in the remote inventory panel.2 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area 6.2. inside the Resource Detail area. 3 · 1 · 143 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 143 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.6. Remote inventory data won’t be available for levels that do not have remote inventory itself. if available. as IDU Ch#1 or IDU Ch#0.2. The whole information related to selected equipment type can be read.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 Remote Inventory tab-panel The Remote Inventory feature stores information used to identify all product components.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 144 .Blank Page 3 · 1 · 144 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 145 .7 Tab-panel Protection Schemes 3 · 1 · 145 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.7 Tab-panel Protection Schemes 7.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note 1: For the pair of Core-E units (slot 1 and 2) the only protection type is the Equipment Protection.1 General The 1+1 protection schemes implemented are: Equipment protection: EPS protection in Tx and Rx sides (this protection scheme can be implemented for all the unit types: Radio unit. if in the synchronization tab panel the Primary Source and the Secondary Source have been selected. Note 2: For the pair of Radio units the protection type are the Equipment Protection.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 1 · 146 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Note 3: For the pair of PDH units the only protection type is the Equipment Protection. PDH unit and Core-E unit) Rx Radio protection: RPS Hitless Switch in Rx side (available for the Radio unit only) HSB protection: Hot Stand-by protection (available for the Radio unit only) FD protection: Frequency Diversity protection (available for the Radio unit only) Synchronization protection: This protection scheme will appear.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 146 . Radio Protection and HSB Protection or FD protection.

] Protection scheme screen 3 · 1 · 147 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 General [cont. Summary Block Diagram View and All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To see the current position of the switches enter the menu Diagnosis click on the icon of the equipped units.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 147 .7 Tab-panel Protection Schemes 7.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 148 .2 EPS Management The Equipment Protection Management is performed by selecting the Equipment Protection tree element.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The tab-panels are: Protection Schema Parameters Commands 3 · 1 · 148 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.7 Tab-panel Protection Schemes 7. This window allows a complete view of all NE resource involved in the EPS protection.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

g. 3 · 1 · 149 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The parameters are: Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 149 . e.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. a working channel (Main) is protected by a protecting channel (Spare). Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Note: The Core protection type is Revertive and cannot be changed. Restoration Criteria: it defines if automatic restoration from protecting to protected channel is allowed (revertive mode) or inhibited (not revertive mode). The supported type is: 1+1.7. The operator choice for “Operation Type” will be applied by clicking on “Apply” button.2 EPS Management 7.1 Protection Schema Parameters The tab-panel “Schema Parameters” displays the parameters that can be modify.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: On the Main#1 channel the only available commands are Manual and Forced. Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel). Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in service Channel 0. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Commands To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view or on the Main #1 element.2. On the Spare#0 channel the only available commands are Manual and Lockout. it will be removed by an incoming alarm. Select the suitable command and click on Apply. All Rights Reserved © 2007. This command activates signaling ABN. To release a previously activated command select None and click on Apply. Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands generated by the logic. This command does not activate signaling ABN. The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commands Lockout. 3 · 1 · 150 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.B.7. independently of the possible active alarms.2 EPS Management 7. In both case. If this command is active. Forced and Manual. independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN. WARNING: the EPS Lockout command is not error free. even if it is raised when traffic is not on the spare channel. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. Note: The “Forced” command for channel 1 is equivalent to the “Lockout” command for the channel 0.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 150 .2. the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standby status. Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch. Command priority list Command Lockout Forced Automatic switch Manual Priority 1 2 3 4 N.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.7 Tab-panel Protection Schemes 7.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 151 .2. This window allows a complete view of all NE resource involved in a RPS protection.3 RPS Management The Radio Protection Management is performed by selecting the Rx Radio Protection element tree. The tab-panels are: Protection Schema Parameters Commands 3 · 1 · 151 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

3 RPS Management 7.2.7. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3. 3 · 1 · 152 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Schema Parameters are: Protection Type field: defines the protection schema architecture: 1+1 hitless. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 152 . Operation Type field: the possible values are revertive (automatic restoration allowed) or notRevertive (automatic restoration Inhibited).1 Protection Schema Parameters The tab-panel “Protection Schema Parameters” displays the parameters that can be modify.

Select the suitable command and click on Apply.B. To release a previously activated command select None and click on Apply. The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commands Lockout. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in service Channel 0. This command activates signaling ABN. it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling ABN. 3 · 1 · 153 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: On the Main#1 channel the only available commands are Manual and Forced.3. Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands generated by the logic. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. independently of the possible active alarms. If this command is active.7.2. On the Spare#0 channel the only available commands are Manual and Lockout. the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standby status.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 153 . independently of the possible active alarms. Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel).3 RPS Management 7. Forced and Manual. Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch.2 Commands To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view or on the Main #1 element. This command activates signaling ABN. In both case. Command priority list Command Lockout Forced Automatic switch Manual Priority 1 2 3 4 N. Note: The “Forced” command for channel 1 is equivalent to the “Lockout” command for the channel 0.

The tab-panels are: Protection Schema Parameters Commands 3 · 1 · 154 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. This window allows a complete view of all NE resource involved in the protection. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.4 HSB Protection Management The Transmission Protection Management is performed by selecting the HSB Protection element tree.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 154 .7 Tab-panel Protection Schemes 7.

a working element is protected by one protecting unit. The operator choice for «Operation Type» will be applied clicking on “Apply” button.e.4.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 155 . All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The supported type are: 1+1 (onePlusOne) .g.2.4 HSB Protection Management 7.1 Protection Schema Parameters The tab-panel “Protection Schema Parameters” displays the parameters that can be modify. 3 · 1 · 155 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Schema parameters are: Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. Operation type: it defines if automatic restoration from protecting to protected unit is allowed (revertive mode) or inhibited (not revertive mode).7.

Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch. The operator by the Craft Terminal can modify the state of the switch through commands Lockout. Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands generated by the logic. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. independently of the possible active alarms. All Rights Reserved © 2007. This command activates signaling ABN.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: On the Main#1 channel the only available commands are Manual and Forced. This command activates signaling ABN. To release a previously activated command select None and click on Apply.4 HSB Protection Management 7. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation connects to the antenna Transmitter 1 (default transmitter). If this command is active. 3 · 1 · 156 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Note: The “Forced” command for channel 1 is equivalent to the “Lockout” command for the channel 0. This command does not activate signaling ABN. Command priority list Command Lockout Forced Automatic switch Manual Priority 1 2 3 4 N. it will be removed by an incoming alarm. Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command connects to the antenna Transmitter 0. Select the suitable command and click on Apply. independently of the possible active alarms. the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standby status.2 Commands To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element or on the Main #1 element in the Tree view.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 156 . On the Spare#0 channel the only available commands are Manual and Lockout.B.4. In both case.7. Forced and Manual.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 157 .8 Tab-panel Synchronization 3 · 1 · 157 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.

1 Menu Synchronization 3 · 1 · 158 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Using “Synchronization” tab view (shown in the figure below) the operator can select and configure synchronization source(s) for the equipment. The Resource list area shows the configuration summary describing current synchronization. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. the operator can select Input and Output ports and can discriminate between different possible “Primary” or “Secondary” sources. according to the Role. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 158 . Together with “Role” and “Restoration” criteria.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Synchronization menu allows the operator to manage the synchronization features.2.8 Tab-panel Synchronization 8.

+ 6 dBm into 50 . electrical levels according G. which can be used to synchronize other NEs. + 6 dBm into 50 . sine-wave.703. The NEC is locked to a Synchronization Source.2 How to synchronize Each Network Element must have a reference Clock (NEC).2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. [4] Radio Port: Symbol Rate of the Rx signal of any available Radio direction (the specific Radio Port has to be chosen) 3 · 1 · 159 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. The NEC also provides a Sync Out port on the Core-E Module. which can be configured according to the following options: a) 2.048 MHz. The sources can be: [1] Free Run Local Oscillator. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Such clock is a 25 MHz generated in the Core-E Module.8 Tab-panel Synchronization 8. sine-wave c) 10 MHz.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 159 . which will be distributed to each board of the NE. [2] Any E1 available at input traffic interfaces (the specific E1 port has to be chosen) [3] Sync-In port is a specific synchronization input. clause 13 b) 5 MHz.

2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 How to synchronize [cont.] 3 · 1 · 160 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.8 Tab-panel Synchronization 8.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 160 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

2 How to synchronize [cont. For each available sync source. the signal Degrade Alarm is detected on each available sync source. If the selected Master Primary Source is 1) then the Master Secondary Source doesn't need to be selected because the Primary is never supposed to fail. 3 · 1 · 161 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. 2) or 3).] All the NEC has to be configured as Master Role or Slave Role. 2) or 3). 2) or 3). The Primary Source must chosen between 3) and 4) Slave primary sources is allowed to be 3) for full indoor configuration and future Piling configuration The Secondary Source can be chosen among 1). The Restoration Mode can be Revertive and Not Revertive The Primary sources must be chosen among 1).8 Tab-panel Synchronization 8. If Master Role. If Slave Role. If the selected Master Primary Source is 2) or 3) then Master Secondary Source must be selected among 1). The Restoration Mode is fixed to Revertive.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Each Module will mute its own Synchronization clock in case of Fail Alarm. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Such Signal Degrade alarm raises also in case of muted (missing) clock. Only one Master is allowed in the network. causes the switching of the Synchronization Source. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The Signal Degrade Alarm relevant to the selected Synchronization Source. or the relevant Card Fail.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 161 .

2.Blank Page 3 · 1 · 162 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 162 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 163 .2.9 Tab-panel Connections 3 · 1 · 163 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

In the Resource Detail Area are available two different functions usable to export and save crossconnections data with different formats: hardcopy (Send To Printer).9 Tab-panel Connections 9.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. file (Export To File).1 Menu Connections 3 · 1 · 164 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This menu (available in the Main view) contains a summary table for all the implemented cross-connections. This menu is shown in the figure.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 164 .

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.10 PDH view for PDH domain 3 · 1 · 165 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 165 .

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This menu opens with double click on a PDH unit in the Equipment tab-panel.10 PDH view for PDH domain 10. All Rights Reserved © 2007. In the Resource List Area is given the information related to the tributaries: 1) Port Number: port for a given channel and type of port 2) Signal Mode: type of frame (Framed/Unframed/Disabled) 3) Flow Id: identifier of the tributary for the cross-connection 4) Service Profile: possible profile to be associated to the tributary (TDM2TDM/TDM2Eth) 5) Payload: bytes of the payload (256) 6) ECID Tx: Emulated Circuit Identifier in Tx direction 7) ECID Rx: Emulated Circuit Identifier in Rx direction 8) TDM Clock source: type of the clock to be associated to the tributary (Adaptive/Differential/Tdmline) Note: Columns 5. 6.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 166 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 7 and 8 are only available if the Service Profile is TDM2Eth.1 PDH Unit configuration 3 · 1 · 166 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

] For every E1 tributary two tab-panels are available: Alarms tab-panel Settings tab-panel 3 · 1 · 167 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.10 PDH view for PDH domain 10.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 PDH Unit configuration [cont.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 167 .

For every alarm the following information is given: Severity: the severity associated to the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile Event Time: the time of the generation of the alarm Entity: the entity involved in the alarm Probable Cause: the probable cause of the alarm Managed Object Class: the class of the alarm.1.2. which checks the current state of alarms related to the selected object. By putting a tick in the Include alarms from sub-nodes box the alarms currently active in the sub-nodes of the object will also appear.1 Alarms tab-panel The Alarms tab panel provides the fault management.10.1 PDH Unit configuration 10. The alarm tab panel has one row for each possible alarm. 3 · 1 · 168 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. When the alarm disappears it is automatically cleared in the screen.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 168 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. but only rows related to the active alarms are highlighted.

In the unit it is not possible to have mixed configurations with service profiles using RTP and other service profiles not using RTP.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Warning: to change something in the Settings tab-panel first changes the Signal Mode to Unframed.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 169 .Real Time Protocol is used).2 Settings tab-panel This tab-panel performs all available functions for a tributary port. all the other fields can be changed. Example: if in the unit only one E1 has service profile TDM2TDM it is possible to configure other E1 with service profile TDM2Eth only with the Differential clock source (not with the Adaptive clock source). 3 · 1 · 169 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Fields ECID Tx. Payload Size and TDM Clock Source can be written only if the Service Profile is TDM2Eth. Buttons: Apply: the configuration for the selected E1 tributary will become active Apply to All: the configuration present in the screen will be applied to all the ports. Flow Id: To implement cross-connections between line side and radio side each E1 tributary must be associated to an identifier. Enter the Flow identifier value in the relevant field (possible values: 2 to 4080) and press Apply. therefore the selection of the desired tributary port in the tabular view enables the “Resource Detail list” to show the available functions for the single one resource. All Rights Reserved © 2007. In the Setting tab-panel there are the following fields: Port Number: identifies the ports for a given interface and type of port (read-only fields) Signal Mode.1 PDH Unit configuration 10. With the TDM2TDM service profile the TDM Clock source is fixed to Differential (RTP . the interface selection in the tree view is first required. The possible values are: Unframed for the unframed received signal Disabled The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the “Apply” button to send the new value to NE. To define the involved ports.1.Real Time Protocol is used) or Adaptive (RTP is not used). Alarm profile: Not implemented now. If the Adaptive clock source is requested the E1 must be connected to another PDH unit. with the TDM2Eth service profile the TDM Clock source can be Differential (RTP .2. The managed tributary types are E1 streams. Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the help on line. After this. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. ECID Rx.10.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 170 .Blank Page 3 · 1 · 170 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 171 .11 Radio view for Radio domain 3 · 1 · 171 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Loopback: activates the loopbacks available with the equipment.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To enter this menu double click on the front panel of the Radio unit in the Equipment tab-panel and then click on the setting tab-panel. Five tab panels are present: Alarms: shows the active alarms Settings: configures some radio parameters Measurements: performs the Tx and Rx power measurements.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 172 . The above screen opens.2.11 Radio view for Radio domain 11.1 Radio domain menu 3 · 1 · 172 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

11 Radio view for Radio domain 11.2 Settings This tab-panel is divided in 3 areas: Direction # Channel 1 Channel 0 (present only in 1+1 configuration) 3 · 1 · 173 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 173 .2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 174 .11.2.2 Settings 11.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Direction area This area is divided in 3 parts: 1) Mode 2) Link Identifier Configuration 3) PPP RF 3 · 1 · 174 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 175 .1 Mode a) Operation without the Adaptive Modulation Select in the Mode field “Presetting”.1.2. Select in the Reference Channel Spacing field the suitable channel spacing to be used. Radio unit without Adaptive Modulation settings 3 · 1 · 175 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Select in the Modulation field the suitable Modulation scheme.1 Direction area 11.2. To confirm the selection click on Apply.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. According to the selected Channel Spacing and to the Modulation the relevant capacity in the Capacity field will appear.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The operation mode can be without or with the Adaptive Modulation. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.11.

2.76 Mbit/s 43.88 Mbit/s 21. All Rights Reserved © 2007.56 Mbit/s 156.60 Mbit/s 166.64 Mbit/s 21.1 Operation and Maintenence Net radio throughput 10. channelling scheme and modulation (Static Modulation) Channel 7 MHz Modulation 4 QAM 16 QAM 64 QAM 4 QAM 14 MHz 16 QAM 64 QAM 4 QAM 16 QAM 28 MHz 32 QAM 64 QAM 128 QAM 256 QAM 56 MHz 3 · 1 · 176 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.60 Mbit/s All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 E1 Equivalent Capacity (TDM2TDM) 4 E1 8 E1 13 E1 8 E1 18 E1 27 E1 18 E1 37 E1 48 E1 56 E1 68 E1 77 E1 72 E1 136 E1 16 QAM 128 QAM Warning: Modulation 256 QAM with 56 MHz spacing is not supported.28 Mbit/s 43.52 Mbit/s 87.] Radio capacity.76 Mbit/s 32.36 Mbit/s 130.1 Direction area 11.40 Mbit/s 313.80 Mbit/s 177. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.52 Mbit/s 65.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 176 .1 Mode [cont.11.1.2.04 Mbit/s 111.

1 Operation and Maintenence The main idea behind Adaptive Modulation in Point to Point system is to adjust adaptively the modulation as well as a range of other system parameters based on the near-instantaneous channel quality information perceived by the receiver. Select in the Mode field “Adaptive Modulation”. but first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 64 QAM. Select in the Reference Mode field the spectral efficiency class to be set as reference. which shows the current used modulation. The current modulation will depend on the fading activity during the propagation. The Current Modulation field is a read-only field. The default value is approx. To confirm the selection click on Apply.2. it is possible to increase or decrease the part of the screen relevant to the parameters of the Adaptive Modulation.] b) Operation with the Adaptive Modulation Select in the Remote Threshold field how many dB the switching thresholds have to be moved from the default value (+4 dB/-2 dB). The switching between the modulation schemes is hitless and maintains the same RF channel bandwidth. to pass to 4 QAM first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 4 QAM. 6 dB below the 10-6 Rx threshold.11.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 177 . Select in the Modulation Range field the Modulation range (4/16 QAM or 4/16/64 QAM) to be used by the Adaptive Modulation. Also if the current Modulation is 64 QAM. which is fed back to the transmitter with the aid of a feedback channel. below the Forced Modulation field. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Select in the Reference Channel Spacing field the suitable channel spacing. Note: If the current Modulation scheme is 4 QAM. The Adaptive Modulation is available for unprotected (1+0) and Protected (1+1 HSB) Radio configuration without ATPC.2. Warning: with the up and down arrows.1 Direction area 11.1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. it not possible to force to 64 QAM. With a check mark in the Manual Operation box it is possible to force a modulation scheme by selecting the scheme in the Forced Modulation field.1 Mode [cont. Radio unit with Adaptive Modulation settings All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 · 1 · 177 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.

88 Mbit/s 21. channelling scheme and modulation (Adaptive Modulation) Channel Spacing Modulation 4 QAM 28 MHz 16 QAM 64 QAM 4 QAM 14 MHz 16 QAM 64 QAM 4 QAM 7 MHz 16 QAM 64 QAM Net radio throughput 43.76 Mbit/s 43.52 Mbit/s 87. the check is performed taking into account the capacity of the 4 QAM modulation scheme for the relevant Channel Spacing. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.76 Mbit/s 32. When the Admission Control is enabled.2.11.1 Mode [cont. When the Admission Control is disabled.64 Mbit/s Equivalent capacity E1 (Note) 18 E1 37 E1 56 E1 8 E1 18 E1 27 E1 4 E1 8 E1 13 E1 3 · 1 · 178 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 178 .1 Direction area 11.2.28 Mbit/s 10.1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. the check is performed taking into account the capacity of the highest modulation scheme for the relevant Channel Spacing (64 QAM for 4-16-64 QAM range or 16 QAM for 4-16 QAM range).04 Mbit/s 130.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: The Admission Control for TDM flows (cross-connected to radio direction working in Adaptive Modulation) can be enabled or disabled.] Radio capacity.56 Mbit/s 21.52 Mbit/s 65.

00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 179 .2. select the unit and remove the protection scheme 3. Enter the Main Radio unit setting tab-panel: set Mode Adaptive Modulation 4. select the unit and create the protection scheme (1+1 HSB) 5.] How to change the operation mode (from operation without Adaptive Modulation to operation with Adaptive Modulation) in 1+1 HSB configuration Follow the procedure: 1. Create again the protection scheme: enter the Equipment tab-panel. Mute the 2 Transmitters 2. Remove the protection scheme: enter the Equipment tab-panel.1. Remove the muting from the Transmitters.2. 3 · 1 · 179 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Mode [cont.11.1 Direction area 11.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Consequently. 3 · 1 · 180 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 180 . this applies when the highest modulation scheme of the new channel spacing has a capacity which is larger than the one with the old channel spac-ing. If all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH stays in the capacity associated to the lowest modulation scheme. they will be kept and the residual bandwidth for the lowest modulation scheme is recomputed. Capacity Down-Grade When the admission control is enabled this applies when the lowest modulation scheme of the new channel spacing has a capacity which is smaller than the one with the old channel spacing. The residual bandwidth for the lowest modulation scheme is recomputed. this applies when the lowest modulation scheme of the new channel spacing has a capacity which is larger than the one with the old channel spacing.1. In this case all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH will be kept. the change of channel spacing is rejected by CT/NMS.11. In this case all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH will be kept.1 Direction area 11. When the admission control is disabled.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 A specific behavior must be followed when the Channel Spacing needs to be changed. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.2. two cases must be taken into account: Capacity Upgrade and Capacity Down-Grade.1 Mode [cont.] Channel Spacing Change Capacity Up-Grade When the admission control is enabled. to pre-serve any pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH. If all the preconfigured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH cannot stay in the capacity associated to the lowest modulation scheme.2. The residual band-width for the highest modulation scheme is recomputed.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] When the admission control is disabled this applies when the highest modulation scheme of the new channel spacing has a capacity which is smaller than the one with the old channel spac-ing. they will be kept and the residual bandwidth for the highest mod-ulation scheme is recomputed.2. the change of channel spacing is rejected by CT/NMS. 3 · 1 · 181 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. If all the preconfigured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH cannot stay in the capacity associated to the highest modulation scheme.11.1 Mode [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 181 .1. If all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH stays in the capacity associated to the highest modulation scheme.2.1 Direction area 11.

otherwise all pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH will be completely lost.11. since the admission control was performed with the capacity of the highest modulation scheme.1.] Modulation Change Capacity Up-Grade This applies when the new modulation scheme has a capacity which is larger than the old one. the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH traffic must be managed according to the behavior here after described. When the admission control is enabled. When the admission control is disabled. all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH will be kept. When the admission control is enabled all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH are kept. Two cases must be taken into account: Capacity Up-grade and Capacity Down-Grade. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Capacity Down-Grade This applies when the new modulation scheme has a capacity which is smaller than the old one. When the admission control is disabled all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH will work if the current capacity is able to support all of them.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 182 . All Rights Reserved © 2007. since the admission control was performed with the capacity of the lowest modulation scheme.2.2.2. 3 · 1 · 182 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 When the AM engine changes the modulation. otherwise all preconfigured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH will not work. all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH will be kept if the current capacity is able to support all of them.1 Mode [cont.1 Direction area 11.

are generic. stay in the capacity associated to the lowest Modulation Scheme. When the Adaptive Modulation is enabled and Admission Control is enabled the behavior is: If all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH in the Old Static Modem Profile.1.1 Direction area 11. the request of change is rejected.2. the request of change is accepted and the residual bandwidth for the lowest Modulation Scheme is computed. All Rights Reserved © 2007. The changes cover both the change of the modulation but with the same Channel Spacing and the change of the Channel Spacing. 3 · 1 · 183 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. If all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH cannot stay in the capacity of the New Static Modem Profile. Two cases must be taken into account: from Static to Adaptive Modulation and from Adaptive to Static Modulation. If all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH cannot stay in the capacity associated to the lowest Modulation Scheme. if all the pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH in the Old Adaptive Modem Profile. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. the request of change is rejected. here below described. The working mode changes.2. stays in the capacity of the New Static Modem Profile. When the Adaptive Modulation is enabled and Admission Control is disabled all the pre-con-figured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH in the Old Static Modem Profile stay in the capacity associated to the highest Modulation Scheme.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 183 .2. then the request of change is always accepted and the residual bandwidth for the highest Modulation Scheme is computed.11. the request is accepted and the residual bandwidth for new Static Modem Profile will be computed.] Modulation Working Mode Change From Static to Adaptive Adaptive Modulation can be enabled only if the ATPC is disabled. in order to preserve any pre-configured TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH. From Adaptive to Static When the Adaptive Modulation is disabled.1 Mode [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 A specific behavior must be followed when it is needed to move from Adaptive Modulation to Static Modulation or vice-versa.

All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 1 · 184 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The operator choices will be sent to the NE by clicking on the related “Apply” button. If the Link Identifier is Enabled the following fields can be written: Expected Identifier: this field is the link identifier expected at the receiving NE Sent Identifier: this field is the link identifier inserted on the transmitting NE.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 184 .1. if necessary.2 Link Identifier Configuration The operator can define the expected and sent identifier values of parameters related to the link management and.2. modify them.11.1 Direction area 11.2.2.

3 PPP RF The “PPP-RF” interface is a communication interface based on the use of an inframe RF proprietary 64 kbit/s channel. If enabled.1.2. The PPP-RF channel can be Enabled or Disabled.2. In the Routing IP Protocol field enter the used IP protocol and in case of OSPF protocol select also the associated OSPF area.2.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 185 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 1 · 185 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Direction area 11. in the Remote Address field will appear the IP address of the remote connected NE.11. Through the “PPP-RF” interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS (or Craft Terminal) station. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

2.11.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 186 .2 Channel area This area is divided in 5 parts: 1) Frequency 2) ATPC (this menu is alternative to Manual Transmit Power Control menu) 3) Manual Transmit Power Control (this menu is alternative to ATPC menu) 4) Tx Mute 5) Alarm Profile 3 · 1 · 186 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Settings 11.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. In the Tx frequency field insert the suitable Tx frequency (the Rx frequency is automatically calculated by using the inserted Tx frequency and the shifter) and press push-button Apply. There are ODUs which can manage only one shifter or several predefined shifters.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 187 . In the Shifter field select the suitable shifter.2.2 Channel area 11.1 Frequency The system can operate with different types of ODU according to the RF band and to the channel arrangement. 3 · 1 · 187 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.2.11.

regarding the Tx Range in the ATPC management. ATPC Range The Min Tx power and Max Tx power.2. can be written in the relevant field.2. The new value will be applied when the Apply button is pressed. If the ATPC has been enabled.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: the ATPC area is not present if the Adaptive Modulation has been selected. When the Rx power is equal to this power the ATPC algorithm starts to operate.11.2 ATPC The ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled. When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 188 .2. 3 · 1 · 188 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 Channel area 11. When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied. ATPC Rx Threshold The value of the low power threshold can be changed by writing the new value in the field. the ATPC Range and ATPC Rx Threshold parameters must be filled.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: the same power value will be used by the 16 QAM and 64 QAM modulation schemes All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. For the Tx Power range refer to the table.2 Channel area 11.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 189 .2. Tx Power (with Adaptive Modulation) The operator can modify only the 4 QAM field. In this field write the new value within the allowed transmitted power range.2. which will be used with 4 QAM modulation. The power range is shown on the right side and depends on the selected reference mode. For the Tx Power range refer to the table.3 Manual Transmit Power Control Manual Transmit Power Control (without Adaptive Modulation) If the ATPC is disabled the manual Tx Power field is present. In this field the operator has to enter the constant power. The range is shown on the right side of Manual Transmit Power Control area.11. 3 · 1 · 189 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.

5 25.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © 2007.5 26.5 26.5 8.5 23 22 20 Tx Power min dBm max dBm Tx Power min dBm 3 5 5 3 8 8 3 11 11 max dBm 23 21 20 23 21 20 23 21 20.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 190 .5 28.5 28.5 10 10 max dBm 28.3 Manual Transmit Power Control [cont.2.5 26.5 26.5 8.2.5 25.5 24.5 16 22 14 19 13 18 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.5 8.5 24.5GHz 11GHz 13GHz 15GHz QAM Tx Power min dBm max dBm Tx Power min dBm 8.5 28.5 24.5 8.11.2.5 8.5 26.2 Channel area 11.5 28.5 25.5 8.5 20 19 17 Tx Power min dBm 2 4 4 2 7 7 2 10 7 10 10 10 max dBm 22 20 19 22 20 19 22 20 19.5 24.5 26 25.5 22.5 25.5 13 13 13 13 13 14 13 13 21 20 18 11 11 11 15. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5 26.2.5 Tx Power min dBm 8.5 19 18 16 7 7 7 14 14 14 28 28 28 28 28 28 56 56 3 · 1 · 190 4 16 64 4 16 64 4 16 32 64 128 256 16 128 8.5 Tx Power min dBm 6 7 7 6 10 10 6 13 13 13 13 13 max dBm 26 24 23 26 24 23 26 24 23.5 24.5 26 25.5 13 13 13 13 13 max dBm 28.5 10 10 8.5 15.5 26.5 22.5 26 25.] Tx Power values 6GHz Reference Channel Spacing (MHz) 7GHz 8GHz 10.5 8.5 22.5 13 13 13 13 13 28.

5 -0.2.5 6 6.5 11.5 15.5 17.2 Channel area 11.] 18GHz Reference Channel Spacing (MHz) QAM Tx Power min dBm 7 7 7 14 14 14 28 28 28 28 28 28 56 56 4 16 64 4 16 64 4 16 32 64 128 256 16 128 -0.5 3.5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 1 1 15 13 12 15 13 12.5 6 6.5 max dBm 15.5 19.5 17.5 15.5 12 11 9 13 11 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -1.5 11. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.5 23GHz Tx Power min dBm -0.5 0 0 -0.5 3.5 13.5 13 12.5 3.5 -1 18 16 15 18 16 15.5 17.5 15 14.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 191 .5 15.5 -4.5 8 3.5 11.5 15.11.5 13.2.5 15.5 -0.5 16.5 15.5 -0.5 15.5 17.5 max dBm 19.3 Manual Transmit Power Control [cont.5 -0.5 3 · 1 · 191 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.5 17.5 19.5 17 16.5 3.5 16.5 15 14 12 16 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 17.5 3.5 17.5 13.2.5 17 16.5 14.5 15.5 15.5 19.5 -4 -4 -4.5 26GHz Tx Power min dBm -4.5 13.5 13.5 19.2.5 28GHz Tx Power min dBm -5 -5 max dBm 15 13 32GHz Tx Power min dBm -2 -2 max dBm 18 16 38GHz Tx Power min dBm 0 0 max dBm 17.5 3.5 12.5 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1.5 16.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.5 2 15.5 17.5 2 -0.5 3.5 9.5 17.5 max dBm 19.5 13.5 3.5 13.5 13.5 17.5 5 -0.5 -4.

2.2. To squelch the transmitter select Enable and press Apply button.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.11.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 192 .2 Channel area 11. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.4 Tx Mute The information related to the transmitter status is shown in the Tx Mute field (Off/Manual/Auto).2. The following indications will appear in the Tx Mute field: Off: Transmitter not squelch Manual: Transmitter squelched due to the manual operation Auto: Transmitter squelched due to an automatic operation 3 · 1 · 192 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

2.2 Channel area 11. 3 · 1 · 193 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.11.2.2.5 Alarm Profile Not implemented in the current release.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 193 .

2. 6. Minutes: 0. “Measurement interval” fields allow the operator to set the time duration of the measurement. By selecting Create File the log file is created and a default path and name for this file is displayed to the operator. A 7-day measurement interval is also the maximum allowed interval. The log file contains the sample value and records the measurement up to a maximum dimension (7 days for a 2 s sample time). 3 · 1 · 194 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. The choice is among 2. “Sample time” field is the period between two consecutive measurement samples. Note: The file name must not include the following characters: \ ? : * “ < > |.11 Radio view for Radio domain 11. The last section of the dialog is referred to an optional Log file. 60 sec. The Power Measurement Graphic is available only if the CT is connected to the NE. 30. The default is Days: 7. The file is stored in the MPRE_CT_V00. By clicking on the “Start” button the screen “Power Measurement Graphic” appears.08 directory. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Hours: 0. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 194 .07.3 Measurement The Power Measurements capability is performed by means of the Measurement tabbed panel.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Measurement screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measurement.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. added to the start time. Stop time: is the interval time selected in the previous parameters window. Time: is the current response time. The top of the screen offers all the characteristics present in the current measurement: Radio port: gives the symbolic name associated to the radio channel being analyzed Sample time: indicates the frequency used to send the measurement requests to NE. Start time: is the first request time. if the local TX is blue.] 3 · 1 · 195 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. the remote receiver will also have the same color. Log File: is the complete pathname of the file where the received values are stored. Through this screen the operator can see. Note that the colors represent the linked end-point of the two NE.3 Measurement [cont.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Power Measurement Graphic screen shows the Tx and Rx measurements related to the local and remote NE. The top graphic screen area shows the TX curves (local and remote). for example.11 Radio view for Radio domain 11. while the bottom area shows the Rx curves (local and remote).00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 195 . the power transmitted by the local and remote transmitter (Tx) and the power received by the local and remote receiver (Rx). in real time.

Rx local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time. min. current Tx remote value and its current date.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 196 . Tx Far End max Tx remote value and date when this value was received for the first time. Rx remote value and its current date when this value was received for the first time. this table shows the following relevant values of the received and transmitted power: Tx Local End max Tx local value and date when this value was received for the first time. a new table appears.3 Measurement [cont. Tx remote value and its current date when this value was received for the first time. The confirmation of the loss of the supervision is given by a broken red icon in NES screen. current Rx local value and its current date.11 Radio view for Radio domain 11. If in the Tx end field the indication in dBm is +99 and. Rx Far End max Rx remote value and date when this value was received for the first time. Tx local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. min. min. in the relevant Rx end field the information in dBm is -99. at the same time. min. N.] 3 · 1 · 196 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.B. Rx Local End max Rx local value and date when this value was received for the first time.2. PTx and PRx levels software readings tolerance is: PTx = Real Value ± 3dB PRx = Real Value ± 5dB WARNING: If in the Tx end field the indication in dBm is +99. on the left side of the Power Measurement Graphic. current Tx local value and its current date. probably the supervision has been lost.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 By clicking on «Show details» box. current Rx remote value and its current date. the Transmitter is off (or in HST Configuration the transmitter is in standby).

2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 1 · 197 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.g. WordPad) and to see the power information in tabular mode. As default the measurement files are stored in the MPRE_CT_V00. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.txt file and click with the mouse right push-button to open .07. Select the desired file and click the Open button in the Power Measurement tab panel to open the file.3 Measurement 11.txt file with a text editor (e.1 How to read a Power Measurement file Click on Read File field and press on the Select File button.B.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 197 .08 directory and have extension . Click again the button Open on the right side of the Sample Time field.3. Select the . The buttons in the lower part of the window allow to flow the graph within the measurement interval.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 N.txt. The directory of the CT automatically opens to navigate and get the power measurement file.11.

This area enable to perform the available functions for the involved resource. Resource Detail Area: displays.11 Radio view for Radio domain 11.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 198 . sorted by number. through tabbed windows. Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the loopback supported by the resource selected in the tree area. In this area the following information is given: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Interface: the number of the channel and the type of the loopback Direction: the type of the loopback (Internal/Internal IF/External Line) Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active) Activation date: the date of loopback activation Timeout: the timeout period. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. In the Resource List Area are listed all the loopbacks which can be performed.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This domain view consists of the following areas: Resource Tree Area: displays the object on which the loopbacks can be performed. 3 · 1 · 198 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. the properties done in list area.4 Loopback The functions described in this section allow to perform the test operations by loopbacks. if has been set.

1 How to activate a loopback [1] Before to activate the loopback (IF loopback) squelch the local transmitter.2. [5] The Loopback is now ACTIVE (in the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the relevant loopback will change from Not Active to Active). 3 · 1 · 199 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. [2] Select the suitable loopback to be activated by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree Area or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area. [3] Select Active in the Activation field. because the loopback is NOT “Loop and Continue” type.11. 4 days).00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 199 .4. At the end of this period the loopback will be automatically deactivated. [4] Click on Apply. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 Loopback 11.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: In the Timeout Period field a timeout period can be set for the loopback activation (max.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.4 Loopback 11.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 200 .2 How to remove a loopback [1] Select the suitable loopback to be removed by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree Area or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.4. [2] Select Not Active in the Activation field. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. [5] Remove the squelch of the local Transmitter. [3] Click on Apply.11. 3 · 1 · 200 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. [4] The Loopback is now DEACTIVATED (in the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the relevant loopback will change from Active to Not Active).

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 201 .2.12 Core-E view for Core-E and Ethernet domain 3 · 1 · 201 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

displaying Ethernet physical interface with related port number.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This menu opens with a double click on the Core-E unit in the Equipment tab-panel. Resource Detail. displaying tabular information about tributaries in tree area.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 202 . Resource List.1 Core-E domain The Core-E domain multiple main view contains two tab-panels: Ethernet Physical Interface TMN Interface Core-E Main view 3 · 1 · 202 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.12 Core-E view for Core-E and Ethernet domain 12. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. This domain view consists of the following areas: Resource Tree. All Rights Reserved © 2007. providing access to Core-E detail view “Alarms” and “Settings”.

1 Ethernet Physical Interface This tab-panel refers to the 4 Ethernet ports.2.12.1. which can be used as traffic ports and includes two tab-panels: Alarm tab-panel Settings tab-panel 3 · 1 · 203 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Core-E domain 12.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 203 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 204 .2.1.1 Core-E domain 12. which can be used as traffic ports and includes two tab-panels: Alarm tab-panel Settings tab-panel 3 · 1 · 204 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Ethernet Physical Interface [cont.12.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] This tab-panel refers to the Ethernet ports.

1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 205 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1. 3 · 1 · 205 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Alarm tab-panel “Alarm” view shows the Ethernet ports-related alarms.2.12.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Ethernet Physical Interface 12.1. Selecting the node in Tree area allows checking Ethernet tributary alarms current state.

: Untagged frames The untagged frames received on one user Ethernet port.1. “100 Mb/s – Half Duplex”.: Priority frames The priority packets (VLAN-ID=0) received on one user Ethernet port.B. The priority packets (VLAN-ID=0) received on one user Ethernet port. are dropped.1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Settings view performs all the available functions for Ethernet tributary ports.: Only asymmetric pause capability can be configured to transmit pause frame but not receive pause frame on the Ethernet ports. to be added in ingress to untagged frames. For each port it is possible to configure: Acceptable Frame Type: Admit tagged only (only tagged frames are allowed in ingress) Admit all (tagged and untagged frames are allowed in ingress) Default value: “Admit all”. with the “Admit all” configuration enabled. received on each user Ethernet port. Alarm Profile (not implemented). Information related to a data port configuration is provided by the following parameters: Port Status (Enabled or Disabled). “100 Mb/s – Full Duplex”). N. The Priority values allowed are in the range 0 . Default values for manual mode are 100 Mbit/s.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 206 . the relevant port is removed as member of the VLAN 1. Auto-Negotiation Status (Enabled or Disabled). N. Advertised Capability. The default Port VLAN-ID and Priority values are: VLAN-ID=1. are dropped. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The “Restart” button allows forcing auto-negotiation to begin link re-negotiation.1.2. The traffic.1 Ethernet Physical Interface 12. must be configured. When the Port VLAN-ID value is different from the default value. configured as “Admit tagged only”.B.12. “10 Mb/s – Full Duplex”. PCP=0. All Rights Reserved © 2007. VLAN configuration. If a pause frame is received on Ethernet ports such frame is dropped. (“10 Mb/s – Half Duplex”. can be untagged or tagged.B. pause disable Configuration (“Other” / “Configuring” / “Complete” / “Disabled” / “Parallel Detect Fail”) all read-only. N. full duplex. Only VLAN-ID values already defined (in the VLAN management menu) can be configured for this purpose. are managed as untagged frames for VLAN-ID field. Port VLAN ID: if the Acceptable Frame Type is set to “Admit all” the VLAN-ID and Priority fields. Flow Control (Enabled or Disabled).2 Settings tab-panel (for Ethernet Port#1 to Port#4) 3 · 1 · 206 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.7. configured as “Admit tagged only”. while the Priority field is the same of the received packets.

with the “Admit all” configuration enabled. to be added in ingress to untagged frames. full duplex.12. pause disable Configuration (“Other” / “Configuring” / “Complete” / “Disabled” / “Parallel Detect Fail”) all read-only.1. Port VLAN ID: if the Acceptable Frame Type is set to “Admit all” the VLAN-ID and Priority fields.: Priority frames The priority packets (VLAN-ID=0) received on one user Ethernet port.1. while the Priority field is the same of the received packets. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.: Untagged frames The untagged frames received on one user Ethernet port. are managed as untagged frames for VLAN-ID field. Information related to the port configuration is provided by the following parameters: Port Status (Enabled or Disabled). Auto-Negotiation Status (Enabled or Disabled). When the Port VLAN-ID value is different from the default value. Default values for manual mode are 100 Mbit/s. received on each user Ethernet port.1. must be configured. The Priority values allowed are in the range 0 .3 Settings tab-panel (for Ethernet Port#5) 3 · 1 · 207 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Ethernet Physical Interface 12. the relevant port is removed as member of the VLAN 1. can be untagged or tagged. The priority packets (VLAN-ID=0) received on one user Ethernet port. For each port it is possible to configure: Acceptable Frame Type: Admit tagged only (only tagged frames are allowed in ingress) Admit all (tagged and untagged frames are allowed in ingress) Default value: “Admit all”. N. configured as “Admit tagged only”.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. If a pause frame is received on Ethernet ports such frame is dropped. Optical Info field: it is a read-only field not implemented in the current release. VLAN configuration. PCP=0. Advertised Capability. Flow Control (Enabled or Disabled). Alarm Profile (not implemented).: Only asymmetric pause capability can be configured to transmit pause frame but not receive pause frame on the Ethernet ports.B.B.B.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Settings view performs all the available functions for Ethernet tributary port#5. are dropped. The traffic.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 207 . configured as “Admit tagged only”. Only VLAN-ID values already defined (in the VLAN management menu) can be configured for this purpose. (“1000 Mb/s – Full Duplex”).7. N. The default Port VLAN-ID and Priority values are: VLAN-ID=1. are dropped. The “Restart” button allows forcing autonegotiation to begin link re-negotiation. N.

3 · 1 · 208 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. which can be dedicated to TMN purpose and not to traffic.1.1 Core-E domain 12.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This tab-panel has 2 tab-panels: Alarm tab-panel Settings tab-panel All Rights Reserved © 2007.12. The interfaces are of two types: 1) TMN Ethernet on a dedicated connector 2) Port #4 of the Ethernet traffic ports.2.2 TMN Interface This tab-panel refers to the TMN Interface. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 208 .

Click on Apply to activate the selections.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 If used. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 209 .1 TMN Ethernet port 3 · 1 · 209 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 TMN Interface 12.1. assign also the area number.2. If OSPF has been selected. Selected the IP Routing Protocol: Static Routing or OSPF.12.2. the TMN Ethernet must be: Enabled.1. Assigned an IP address with its IP mask.

2. the port 4 must be: Enabled.2.2 Port #4 TMN Ethernet 3 · 1 · 210 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Assigned an IP address with its IP mask.1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 If the Ethernet Port 4 has been used as TMN port.2 TMN Interface 12. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. assign also the area number. Selected the IP Routing Protocol: Static Routing or OSPF.12.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 210 . If OSPF has been selected. Click on Apply to activate the selections.1.

3 · 1 · 211 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Enable the tributaries. Set the Transmitter of Channel 1 to transmit a constant power. Show the current position of the switches (through their commands in the CT).2. Create some cross-connections. Read the RF frequency of Channel 1. Activate the loopback. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 211 .Answer the Questions Configure the equipment. Read the Rx power of Channel 1. Manually switch the 3 switches to the protecting channel (through their commands in the CT).

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.End of Module Operator interface 3 · 1 · 212 NE operation · Operator interface 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 1 · Page 212 .2.

00 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 1 .Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 3 NE operation Module 2 Initial configuration 3JK Edition 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Blank Page 3·2·2 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 2 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2007-07-30 Author External Consultant Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 3 . 3·2·3 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Objectives Objectives: to be able to Configure the equipment starting from a scratched NE.

2.Objectives [cont.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 4 .1 Operation and Maintenence This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] 3·2·4 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

6 Provision NTP protocol 1.1 Operation and Maintenence · 9500MPR R configuration 2.1D management 2.2 Initial Turn-up 1.8 Cross Connections Configuration 2.15 Typical Report Panel Page 7 8 10 14 23 37 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 51 54 55 56 57 59 61 62 63 66 67 69 70 74 75 81 82 84 85 86 88 89 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 PDH (E1 Access Card) to ETH (Ethernet) 1.1 General Requirements 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 5 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4 Core-E Configuration NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR 2.13 Network Configuration 2.9.10 Provision System 1.9.3 Enable Plug-In Cards 1.3 ETH (Ethernet) to RADIO (Modem Card) 1.10 802.7 Synchronization Configuration 2.2 Provisioning Tool screens 2.12 Port VLAN Configuration 2.9 802.2.4 RADIO (Modem Card) to RADIO (Modem Card) 1.13 Provision Ethernet Port 4 for TMN (if required) 1.4 Provision Plug-In Cards 1.1 PDH-To-Radio 1.12 Provision TMN Ethernet Port 1.5 Provision Synchronization 1.3 Configuration Options Screen All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 · 2 · 52.14 Provision IP Static Routing 1.6 Radio Provisioning 2.1 TCO Main menu 2.9.15 Provision OSPF Static Routing 2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2.8 Provision VLAN 1.7 Provision NE Time 1.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Initial Configuration 1.9 Cross-connections 1.14 Trusted Managers 2.11 Provision Local NE IP Address 1.11 VLAN Management 2.1Q management 2.5 E1 1.9.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] Switch to notes view! Page 3·2·6 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 6 .2.Table of Contents [cont.

2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 7 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Initial Configuration 3·2·7 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

3·2·8 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 8 . 1 Gbyte (suggested) Min. resolution: equal or higher than 1024x768 pixel CD-ROM Drive: 24x Primary Interface: Ethernet Card 10/100 Mbit/sec.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Windows Vista Ultimate. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. JRE excluded) Min.1 General Requirements PC HW Configuration CPU: Pentium III 850 MHz RAM: 500MByte (minimum). Operating Systems Supported Microsoft Windows 32-bit versions: Microsoft Windows XP Professional service pack 2.5 GByte (available space needed for log files.1 Initial Configuration 1. disk space: 1.

7.2. Mozilla Firefox 2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 9 . Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 7.1 General Requirements [cont.11C0 + or higher.] Additional requirements Microsoft Internet Explorer 6. Standard user can be used to run the applications but for TCO Suite usage Administrator password is needed JRE (Java Runtime Environment) 6 Update 3 Disable all Firewall software on used PC 3·2·9 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.12 or higher. Minimum HTML page size shown shall be 1024x768 pixels.0 6.2900.2180 SP1+ or higher. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.10.0.1 Initial Configuration 1.0. Mozilla 1.0.5730.0.

Files window displays D .1 Initial Configuration 1. Database scratch procedure: 1.On Windows desktop. Power off the equipment 2. It is possible to understand when the scratch procedure is over: make a “ping” towards NE with default IP address. The installation process configures the PC for its unique requirements and prepares it to run the program. 3 · 2 · 10 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. 7.2. My Computer window displays.2 4 – Startup Follow the steps on following figures to open communication with the equipment. detects the switch position and starts with database scratch: all the configuration information will be erased (radio parameters. A . 3.Install software on PC. Note: Average time necessary to scratch the database (from SW start): 6-7 minutes. After this. 3 . 5. ecc). All Rights Reserved © 2007. the programs contained on the CD ROM must be installed on the PC. network. The information of SWP is maintained (the stand-by and active SWP banks are not deleted).Establish communication between equipment and Craft terminal computer. C .In My Computer window. synch. When EC software starts. XCONN.1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: if it is necessary to scratch the MIB use the following procedure.Load Craft Terminal software on PC on a directory without blank spaces in the directory name. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. double click on My Computer icon. plug-out the Core-E board and restore the original dip-switch 2 position.Insert CD ROM disk into PC. click on CD ROM icon. 6. Move the dip-switch 2 on the Core-E board.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 10 . Before operating the user system interface (USI) for the first time. B .0.2 Initial Turn-up 1 . 2 . 4.Turn on the 9500MPR. Default NE IP address: 10. Re-plug the Core-E board. Re-plug the Core-E board in the subrack.

] Startup Procedure Insert the NE IP address Click OK Click Show Click OK See next slide 3 · 2 · 11 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 11 .1 Initial Configuration 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 Initial Turn-up [cont.

] Startup Procedure Type in User Name Type in Password Click to start the loading process Loading Performance MIB and other processes loading status.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 12 . When the startup procedure is over.1 Initial Configuration 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.2 Initial Turn-up [cont. Main Screen is displayed 3 · 2 · 12 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

1 Initial Configuration 1.2 Initial Turn-up [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. See the figure for the recommended sequence.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: Changes to provisioning do not have to be made in any particular order.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 13 .2.] 5 .Provisioning MPR START Enable Plug-In Cards Provision Plug-In Cards Provision Synchronization Provision NTP Protocol Provision NE Time Provision VLAN Provision Cross-Connections Provision System Provision IP/SNMP 3 · 2 · 13 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Initial Configuration 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Apply the Equipment Type All Rights Reserved © 2007. if the plug-in has been installed in the Core unit Settings tab 3 · 2 · 14 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3 Enable Plug-In Cards Enabling SFP optical plug-in Click to start Click on Apply on the Plugin Type field to enable the SFP optional optical plug-in.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 14 .2.

1 Initial Configuration

1.3 Enable Plug-In Cards [cont.]
Enabling Spare Core-E Card

Click to start

Choose Core-E from the dropdown menu for the spare protected Core-E card in slot 2 Settings tab Display Profile Name selected on Alarm Severity Profile screen
3 · 2 · 15
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Apply the Equipment Type

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 15

1 Initial Configuration

1.3 Enable Plug-In Cards [cont.]
Enabling E1 Access Card

Click to start

Settings tab Choose the P32E1DS1 unit

Click to apply changes

3 · 2 · 16
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

In order to communicate to the microprocessor in the Core-E Card the slot number & type of board housed in the MSS, E1 Access Card and Radio Access Card have to be enabled. This is accomplished on the Settings screen for that card. The Core-E Card in MSS slot 1 is always enabled. The ODU is enabled automatically when the associated Radio Access Card is enabled. The Fan Unit must be enabled.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 16

1 Initial Configuration

1.3 Enable Plug-In Cards [cont.]
Enabling E1 Access Card

Click to start

Settings tab Choose the P32E1DS1 unit Click to apply changes
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

3 · 2 · 17
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 17

1 Initial Configuration

1.3 Enable Plug-In Cards [cont.]
Enabling E1 Access Card

Click to start

Settings tab

Click to apply changes

Select 1+1 EPS
3 · 2 · 18
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 18

1 Initial Configuration

1.3 Enable Plug-In Cards [cont.]
Enabling Radio Access Card

Click to start

Settings tab Choose the MD300 unit
3 · 2 · 19
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Click to apply changes

Note: ODU is automatically enabled when Radio Access Card is enabled.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 19

1 Initial Configuration

1.3 Enable Plug-In Cards [cont.]
Enabling Radio Access Card

Click to start

Settings tab Choose the MD300 unit
3 · 2 · 20
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Click to apply changes

Note: ODU is automatically enabled when Radio Access Card is enabled.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 20

1 Initial Configuration

1.3 Enable Plug-In Cards [cont.]
Enabling Radio Access Card

Click to start

Settings tab Select the suitable protection scheme
3 · 2 · 21
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Click to apply changes

Note: ODU is automatically enabled when Radio Access Card is enabled.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 21

1 Initial Configuration

1.3 Enable Plug-In Cards [cont.]
Enabling Fan Unit

Click to start

Click to apply changes Settings tab

Select the FANS
3 · 2 · 22
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 22

1 Initial Configuration

1.4 Provision Plug-In Cards
Core-E Card Provisioning (Ethernet ports 1-4)

Double left click

Go to next page
3 · 2 · 23
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 23

1 Initial Configuration

1.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont.]
Core-E Card Provisioning (Ethernet ports 1-4)

Current provisioning for Ethernet Ports #01-#04. Area updates when Apply buttons are clicked
B1 Check to enable the

B2 Click this Apply button. A2 Check to enable NE

auto-negotiation functions.

selector port. Uncheck to disable first in order to change any settings.

A1 Check to allow

A3 Check to enable input

and output pause features.

C1 For the configuration

refer to the Core-E unit.

communication at the selected data rate between two locations. Choose half duplex for only one direction at a time, or full duplex for communication in both directions at the same time.

A4 Click Apply button.

3 · 2 · 24
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 24

1 Initial Configuration

1.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont.]
Core-E Card Provisioning (Ethernet port 5)

Double left click

Go to next page
3 · 2 · 25
NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 25

Uncheck to disable first in order to change any settings. Click Apply button. Check to enable input and output pause features. Check to enable NE auto-negotiation functions. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. The Optical Info field is a read-only field not implemented in the current release. 3 · 2 · 26 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. For the configuration refer to the Core-E unit. Area updates when Apply buttons are clicked.] Core-E Card Provisioning (Ethernet port 5) Current provisioning for Ethernet Port #05.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 26 .1 Initial Configuration 1.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Click this Apply button. Check to enable the selector port.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Initial Configuration 1.] E1 Access Card Provisioning Double left click Go to next page 3 · 2 · 27 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 27 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.

Flow Id: To implement cross-connections between line side and radio side each E1 tributary must be associated to an identifier.2. Enter any number between 2 and 4020.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Choose TDM2TDM if radio is being used to transport E1 data only (no Ethernet). Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.] E1 Access Card Provisioning (TDM2TDM) To enable the port select “Framed/ Unframed” and click on Apply Flow ID number required to transport E1 data. 3 · 2 · 28 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 28 . Enter the Flow identifier value in the relevant field (possible values: 2 to 4080) and press Apply. Apply the Flow ID number.1 Initial Configuration 1.

] E1 Access Card Provisioning (TDM2ETH) Select Adaptive to synch TDM output to packets. Enter any number from Table 4-1 Valid Ranges.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 29 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 2 · 29 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont. Select Differential to synch TDM output to NE Synchronization source. Choose TDM2ETH if radio is being used to transport just Ethernet or Ethernet plus E1 data.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Set ECID (Tx and Rx) values.1 Initial Configuration 1. Apply the Flow ID number.2. Flow ID number required to transport E1 data. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Select Framed: to be able to collect the performances at the input in Tx side and at the output in Rx side. Configures line format. – being dropped or inserted (typical choice for a line being passed through at a through repeater and not being dropped and inserted at a drop and insert repeater).1 Initial Configuration 1.2.] Access Card Details Signal Mode. – being dropped or inserted (typical choice for a line being dropped and inserted at a drop and insert repeater) – 3 · 2 · 30 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 30 .4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Allows user to choose if line is dropped and inserted (by selecting Framed/Unframed) or passed through or not used (by selecting Disabled) Select Disabled if port (E1 line) is not: being used as a source or destination (typical choice for a line not being used at a terminal or not being dropped and inserted at a repeater). Select Unframed: – being used as a source or destination (typical choice for a line being used at a terminal).

1 Initial Configuration 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 31 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] Radio Access Card Provisioning Double left click Go to next page 3 · 2 · 31 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont.

Select from dropdown list.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © 2007. Reference.] Operation without Adaptive Modulation Mode. Select Presetting from dropdown list. Enter number from 1 to 100 for receiver ID. Read Only Field. Displays Profile Name selected on Alarm Severity Profile screen. Click to enable Open Shortest Path First protocol then select area name that has OSPF protocol. When not checked (disabled) user cannot change: • Routing IP Protocol • OSPF Area • Remote Address 3 · 2 · 32 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Check to enable radio ID mismatch function. This is the nominal bit rate for quantity of E1 lines being used. Select from dropdown list.2.1 Initial Configuration 1. Alarm Profile. Select from dropdown list. Must match transmitter ID at other end of hop. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Enter number from 1 to 100 for transmitter ID. Modulation. Read Only Field. Displays reference channel spacing based on capacity and modulation.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 32 . Check to enable PPP RF port. Displays modulation scheme based on reference channel spacing and capacity. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 PPP RF. Capacity.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont. Must match associated receiver ID at other end of hop.

Displays range of TX RF frequencies that may be entered.] Shifter. If the ODU is not connected to the MSS. Remote ATPC Rx Threshold.Increase Reference Channel Spacing. Alarm Profile.X Freq = Shifter Freq.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont. Check to enable ATPC. Tx Mute. Range. Select TX (go) and RX (Return) separation frequency from the Shifter Data Help list.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: When the Mode is changed from Presetting to Adaptive Modulation. Displays Profile Name selected on Alarm Severity Profile Screen. enter the TX RF frequency. ATPC. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. Result of calculation: RX Freq .Reduce the quantity of E1 lines being transported to meet the required capacity.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 33 . Displays RX RF frequency. Read Only Field. TX RF Frequency is automatically entered by ODU when ODU is connected to MSS. If the capacity of the radio (number of E1 lines cross connected) exceeds the available capacity of a 14 MHz Channel at 4 QAM. within allowed range. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Adaptive Modulation will not enable. ATPC Power Range. It may be necessary to perform one of the following provisioning changes: 1. 2.1 Initial Configuration 1. the radio defaults to 14 MHz bandwidth at 4 QAM. Status of Local Tx Mute function. Default value is -55 dBm. Read Only Field. 3 · 2 · 33 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

The default level is 0. Reference Modulation. The operator can select switching levels above threshold (0 to +4 dB corresponding to threshold level +0 to 4 dB) or below threshold (0 to -2 dB) corresponding to threshold level -0 to 2 dB).2. Displays modulation scheme based on the modulation mode. Remote Threshold (dB).1 Initial Configuration 1. Select from the drop down list. Modulation scheme used for path coordination.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont. which corresponds to threshold. Select Adaptive Modulation from the drop down list. Displays reference channel spacing based on the modulation mode and the modulation range. Reference Channel Spacing. (normally worst case is used for path coordination). Modulation Range. Select from the drop down list.] Operation with Adaptive Modulation Mode.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 34 . 3 · 2 · 34 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Displays modulation scheme the radio is currently using. Forced Modulation. Select modulation scheme (one from the Modulation Range selected) to test. allows user to select and test a specific modulation scheme. When not checked (disabled) user cannot change: • Routing IP Protocol • OSPF Area • Remote Address Link Identifier Configuration. When checked. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 · 2 · 35 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. When activated by the Apply button. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Enter number from 1 to 100 for receiver ID. Expected Identifier.1 Initial Configuration 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © 2007. Enter number from 1 to 100 for Transmitter ID. Check to enable PPP RF port.] Manual Operation. Must match transmitter ID at other end of Hop. Sent Identifier. Check to enable radio ID mismatch function. Must match associated receiver ID at other end of hop. radio is forced to operate using selected modulation scheme.4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont. PPP RF. Read Only Field. Current Modulation.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 35 .

enter the TX RF frequency. Displays Profile Name selected on Alarm Severity Profile screen.1 Initial Configuration 1. Status of Local Tx Mute function. Result of calculation: RX Freq . The minimum and maximum range of each modulation scheme is shown in parenthesis (min XX .4 Provision Plug-In Cards [cont. If the ODU is not connected to the MSS.] Select TX (Go and RX (Return) separation frequency from the dropdown list. The default level is the expected output power.TX Freq = Shifter Freq. 3 · 2 · 36 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Read Only Field. Read Only Field.max YY). Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Read Only Field. Displays RX RF frequency.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 36 . Displays range of TX RF frequencies that may be entered. Check to enable the muting of Tx output power. within allowed range.2. The Tx Power function allows the operator to select the transmitter output power of each modulation scheme.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. TX RF Frequency is automatically entered by ODU when ODU is connected to MSS.

The slave radios can be provisioned to receive the sync clock from one of two sources: clock recovered by the radio receiver or the sync clock from another radio in the network. Failed Primary Operation With the exception of the master when the radio is provisioned to sync off the local oscillator. the provisioned secondary sync source is enabled if the primary source fails.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Normal Operation During normal operation. fails. the internal free-running local oscillator is enabled. A typical slave terminal uses the clock from an adjacent radio. Provisioning choices for the secondary source for slave radios depend upon the choices made from the primary source. The slave radios are all synchronised to the clock provided by the master. the master can be provisioned to get sync clock from two separate sources: an internal local oscillator (most common source) or external clock from customer provided equipment. When the master.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 37 . One radio in the network is provisioned as Master. provisioned to accept sync clock at the Core-E from an external source. All Rights Reserved © 2007. must be manually switched to the primary source. and if the secondary source fails. Sync clock switching provisioning is dependent on the role of the radio in the network (master or slave) and on user preference. A revertive switching feature is a provisioning option that restores the sync clock to the original source when the alarm on the primary source is cleared. Sync Switching With the exception of the master when the radio is provisioned to sync off the local oscillator. See following figures for typical master terminal provisioning and for typical slave terminal provisioning.2. 3 · 2 · 37 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All other radios in the network must be provisioned as Slave.1 Initial Configuration 1. If revertive switching is not selected. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. the sync clock is received over the RF path and recovered by the radio receiver.5 Provision Synchronization All 9500 MPR radios in the network must be synchronized to the same clock. Normally at a repeater. the sync clock source is switched from primary to secondary if the primary source fails. the secondary sync source continues to provide sync clock.

] Provisioning Master with Free Run Local Oscillator as Primary Source Go to next page 3 · 2 · 38 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.5 Provision Synchronization [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Initial Configuration 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 38 .

5 Provision Synchronization [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] Provisioning Master with Free Run Local Oscillator as Primary Source From to previous page 3 · 2 · 39 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 39 .1 Initial Configuration 1.2.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] Provisioning Slave with Radio Port as Primary Source Go to next page 3 · 2 · 40 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Initial Configuration 1.2.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 40 .5 Provision Synchronization [cont.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Initial Configuration 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] Provisioning Slave with Radio Port as Primary Source From to previous page 3 · 2 · 41 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 41 .5 Provision Synchronization [cont.

1 Initial Configuration 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. which shows the reachability of the NTP servers. In the Spare Server address field write the IP address of the Spare Server. 3 · 2 · 42 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Put a check mark in the NTP protocol field to enable the protocol and write in the Main Server address field the IP address of the server. The Server reachability field is a read-only field. The following information can appear: "Main server reachable" "Spare server reachable" "None servers reachable" "Both servers reachable" Click on Refresh to update the screen. Click on Apply to send to the NE the NTP Configuration.6 Provision NTP protocol Enable the NTP (Network Time Protocol).00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 42 . which is in charge to distribute the time to all the NEs in the network. if any. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.

When checked.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The user can provision the operating system (PC/laptop) to manage time and date stamping functions.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.7 Provision NE Time NE Time Provisioning Click to display pop-up dialog for NE Time configuration. enables function to synchronize Operating System and Network Equipment Times.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 43 . All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 2 · 43 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Time and date provisioning is accomplished using the NE Time Configuration screen.1 Initial Configuration 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Initial Configuration 1.2.6.8 Provision VLAN To provision VLAN refer to S3-M1 chapter 3. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 44 . 3 · 2 · 44 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Valid Cross Connections: PDH -to.1 Initial Configuration 1.RADIO RADIO -to. Ethernet (ETH) data from/to an external source to/from a Modem Card (RADIO) and/or to/from an E1 Access Card (PDH).9 Cross-connections The cross connections screen is used to configure switching of packetized data through the Core-E Card.RADIO 3 · 2 · 45 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. the operator can switch: E1 ports (lines) from/to an E1 Access Card (PDH) to/from a Modem Card (RADIO) and/or any of four Ethernet (ETH) ports on the Core-E Card.RADIO PDH -to ETH ETH -to.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 45 . Using this screen. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.9 Cross-connections [cont.] Click to open Cross Connections Screen Go to next page 3 · 2 · 46 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 46 .1 Initial Configuration 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1. 5. Follow the steps to cross-connect E1 lines to Radio. The Flow ID number check box on the cross connections screen must be checked for each E1 port to be cross connected. Refer to Flow ID number rules. 3.2.9.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 47 .1. 2. Each E1 port to be cross connected must have a Flow ID number assigned to it on the E1 provisioning screen. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.9 Cross-connections 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The following rules and guidelines apply to switching E1 ports 1 through 32 on the E1 Access Card through the Core-E Card to the Radio Modem Card. The E1 Access Card (E1 source) and Radio Modem Card (destination) must be Enabled on the respective card provisioning screens. Each E1 port to be cross connected must be Enabled on the E1 provisioning screen. The license key installed on the Core-E Card determines the number of E1 ports that can be cross connected. 4.1 PDH-To-Radio Flow ID required to transport E1 line(s) 1-32 you want transported Click to PDH box (source) and drag line to radio box (destination) Double left click anywhere on line to open line select dialog box 3 · 2 · 47 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

7. All Rights Reserved © 2007. 2.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 48 . 5. 3. The MAC Address of the Ethernet equipment connected to the Ethernet connectors on the Core-E card must be entered on the pop up.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The following rules and guidelines apply to switching E1 ports 1 through 32 on the E1 Access Card through the Core-E Card to the Ethernet ports 1 through 4. The Ethernet port (source) and E1 Access Card (destination) must be Enabled on the respective Core-E Card and E1 Access Card provisioning screens. Refer to the Flow ID number rules. The Ethernet port to be cross connected must have a Flow ID number assigned to it on the Ethernet provisioning screen. 1.9. 6.9 Cross-connections 1. Follow the steps to cross-connect PDH to ETH. The Flow ID number check box on the cross connections screen must be checked for each Ethernet port to be cross connected. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The Service Profile on the E1 Access Card Settings screen must be set to TDM2ETH for each E1 cross connected. Refer to the Flow ID Number rules.2 PDH (E1 Access Card) to ETH (Ethernet) 3 · 2 · 48 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. A Flow ID number must be assigned to each E1 cross connected on the E1 Access Card Settings screen.2.1. 4. The license key installed on the Core-E Card determines the capacity of the Ethernet data that can be cross connected.

3.1. Follow the steps to cross connect Ethernet to Radio.2.3 ETH (Ethernet) to RADIO (Modem Card) 3 · 2 · 49 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. The Service Profile on the E1 Access Card Settings screen must be set to TDM2ETH for each E1 cross connected. 1. 6. 5.9. Refer to the Flow ID Number rules. 7. The Ethernet port (source) and Modem Card (destination) must be Enabled on the respective Core-E Card and Modem Card provisioning screens. The license key installed on the Core-E Card determines the Ethernet data capacity that can be cross connected. All Rights Reserved © 2007. The Ethernet port to be cross connected must have a Flow ID number assigned to it on the Ethernet provisioning screen.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 49 . The MAC Address of the Ethernet equipment connected to the Ethernet connectors on the Core-E Card must be entered on the pop up.9 Cross-connections 1. 4. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The Flow ID number check box on the cross connections screen must be checked for each Ethernet port to be cross connected. 2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The following rules and guidelines apply to switching Ethernet ports 1 through 4 on the Core-E Card to the Modem Card. A Flow ID number must be assigned to each E1 cross connected on the E1 Access Card Settings screen. Refer to the Flow ID number rules.

Capacity of Modem Cards on Settings screens must match. Each Modem Card must be enabled.4 RADIO (Modem Card) to RADIO (Modem Card) 3 · 2 · 50 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Follow the steps to cross-connect Radio-to-Radio.9 Cross-connections 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The following rules and guidelines apply to switching Modem Card to Modem Card (such as a through repeater).9.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 50 . 1.1. 3. The license key installed on the Core-E Card determines the Ethernet data capacity that can be cross connected. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 2.

00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 51 .10 Provision System System Setting Go to next page 3 · 2 · 51 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. quality of service classification.1 Initial Configuration 1. and enter NE MAC address. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Follow the steps to provision tributary port impedance.2.

otherwise NE Ethernet port IP address minus one. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1p). The DHCP server uses an address pool of only one IP address. if this address is not a direct broadcast address. To activate the new impedance.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1) Tributary Port Configuration This field allows to set the suitable impedance of the E1 stream (Unbalanced 75 ohms/Balanced 120 ohm).10 Provision System [cont. select Enabled and click on Apply.] System Setting 3 · 2 · 52 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. The IP mask is set to the mask of the NE local Ethernet port and the default gateway is set to the NE IP address.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 52 . If the tag is present the correspondent priority is assigned to the packet. The lease time is fixed to 5 minutes. defined according to the NE Ethernet port IP address: NE Ethernet port IP address plus one. click on Apply. IP mask and default gateway of the PC Ethernet interface used to reach the NE. DiffServ: each packet is classified based on DSCP field in the IP header to determine the priority. this means that for each switch port there is only one queue (FIFO) therefore the first packet that arrives is the first that will be transmitted. To activate the DHCP server. 2) Quality Of Service This field allows to set the suitable Quality Of Service (Disabled/DiffServ/802. The PC must be configured to get automatically an IP address. 3) DHCP The DHCP server configures automatically IP address. click on Apply. all traffic inside the switch has the same priority.1 Initial Configuration 1. If the QoS is disabled.1p: the packet is examined for the presence of a valid 802. The following values are available: IEEE std 802. All Rights Reserved © 2007. The Ethernet switch provides a Quality of Service mechanism to control all streams. To activate the new value.1P user-priority tag.2.

which shows the MAC address of the NE. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. the check is performed taking into account the capacity of the highest modulation scheme for the relevant Channel Spacing (64 QAM for 4-16-64 QAM range or 16 QAM for 4-16 QAM range).10 Provision System [cont. When the Admission Control is "Enabled". the check is performed taking into account the capacity of the 4 QAM modulation scheme for the relevant Channel Spacing.2. 5) Event and Alarm Log As default the Logging is enabled.1 Initial Configuration 1. When the Admission Control is "Disabled". If set to "Disabled" the events are not sent to the Event Log Browser application. Default: “Enabled”. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 4) Admission Control for Adaptive Modulation The Admission Control for TDM flows (cross-connected to radio direction working in Adaptive Mod-ulation) can be enabled or disabled.] 11 12 3 · 2 · 53 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. This MAC address must be used in the cross-connection with TDM2Eth profile. 6) NE MAC Address This field is a read-only field. Warning: The disabling of the Admission Control can be done in 1+0 configuration only.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 53 .

3 · 2 · 54 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Initial Configuration 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 54 . Enter NE IP address Apply the IP Address.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.11 Provision Local NE IP Address Local Configuration Provisioning Click to display popup dialog for the IP Configuration.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Enter IP Mask and click on Apply. All Rights Reserved © 2007.12 Provision TMN Ethernet Port Double click on the front panel of the Core-E unit in the Equipment menu Select the TMN Ethernet Select the Setting tab-panel Enable TMN Ethernet Enter IP address.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Follow the steps to provision TMN Ethernet on the Core-E Card to carry SNMP data.1 Initial Configuration 1. Select OSPF (Open Shortest Path First protocol) for automatic routing.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 55 . Select Static Routing for manual routing. 3 · 2 · 55 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Enter IP Mask and click on Apply.13 Provision Ethernet Port 4 for TMN (if required) Double click on the front panel of the Core-E unit in the Equipment menu Select the Port #4 TMN Ethernet Select the Setting tab-panel Enable the TMN Port 4 Enter IP address Select Static Routing for manual routing. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 2 · 56 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 56 .2.1 Initial Configuration 1. Select OSPF (Open Shortest Path First protocol) for automatic routing.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Follow the steps to provision. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.14 Provision IP Static Routing IP Static Routing Provisioning Click to display pop-up dialog for IP Static Routing Configuration Go to next page 3 · 2 · 57 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Initial Configuration 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 57 .

In this scenario. IP Mask. Also typically used at an end terminal in a radio link for interface with the network.0.2. Click to view drop down list. 3 · 2 · 58 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Create new or change existing IP static routes. Typically used at a spur to interface a host over the RF path.0.0 and the IP Mask (greyed out) is 0. List of RF path directions.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 58 .0. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Enter IP address.1 Initial Configuration 1.0.14 Provision IP Static Routing [cont. the Default Gateway IP Address is 0. IP interface to a host or network.] IP Static Routing Provisioning Route to a specific IP address.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.0.

2. Click to display pop-up dialog for OSPF Area Configuration 3 · 2 · 59 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 59 .15 Provision OSPF Static Routing OSPF Static Routing Provisioning IP Static Routing Configuration screen.1 Initial Configuration 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Follow the steps to provision Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol static (automatic) routing. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Blank Page 3 · 2 · 60 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 60 .2.

2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 3 · 2 · 61 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 61 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 TCO Main menu Open Java runtime environment and start provisioning 3 · 2 · 62 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 62 .

2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2. 3 · 2 · 63 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 63 .2 Provisioning Tool screens This screen gives to the operator the possibility to connect to a NE (by entering the relevant IP address) or to provision an off-line configuration. If you are connected to the NE to get access the NE you have to enter the username (default=initial) and the password (default=adminadmin). By clicking on OK (after loading the JRE package) the opening screen opens.

if the file is correct and contains the wanted configuration.0 old version.0.] Opening screen with off-line operation 3 · 2 · 64 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. which gives the possibility to open a configuration file created in 1.0 configuration file is open a new screen appears.0.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2.0 version or in the 1. By clicking on the "Open" button a window opens. Click "Next" button from such preview panel or "Create" button.0. Cancel: not operative. Get: not operative.1. By clicking on the "Create" button it will be possible to create a file in 1.0. MCML file can contains NE configuration data and it can be used to fill panels fields and data.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 64 .2 Provisioning Tool screens [cont.0 version or in 1. After opening a configuration file.0 old version.1. If a 1.1.0. Create: allows to create a new configuration file. Prev: not operative.0 to 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. for example. which asks to convert the file from 1. the user will see a configuration preview in order to understand.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The buttons present in this screen has the following meaning: Open: allows opening an existing MCML (XML-based) configuration file. Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the help on line.2.

0 old version. Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the help on line. which gives the possibility to open a configuration file created in 1.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2. If a 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.0 configuration file is open a new screen appears. Prev: not operative.0 old version.0. the user will see a configuration preview in order to understand.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 65 . if the file is correct and contains the wanted configuration. for example.2. Click "Next" button from such preview panel or "Create" button.1. MCML file can contains NE configuration data and it can be used to fill panels fields and data. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. By clicking on the "Open" button a window opens.] Opening screen with the connection to the NE 3 · 2 · 65 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The buttons present in this screen has the following meaning: Open: allows opening an existing MCML (XML-based) configuration file.0 version or in 1.0 to 1. By clicking on the "Create" button it will be possible to create a file in 1. Cancel: not operative.0.0 version or in the 1. Get: this button is operative if you are physically connected to the NE and it is used to upload the configuration from the NE to the tool. After opening a configuration file.1.0. which asks to convert the file from 1.0.1.2 Provisioning Tool screens [cont. Create: allows to create a new configuration file.0.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 Configuration Options Screen The screen below is a generic one that depicts all of the pull-down options possible depending on which card is selected in the card slot. See the screens shown below for more information.2. Protections options shown below are for all cards.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 66 . Protections options for the Core-E cards Protections options shown for Slot 3 and Slot 4 Protections options shown for Slot 5 and Slot 6 3 · 2 · 66 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Check to enable the selected port Check to enable auto negotiation Ethernet Icon E1 Access Card Icon When checked this feature enables input and output pause features Radio Access Card Icon Check to allow communication at data rate in both directions at the same time.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. A message is also displayed stating that no more E1 ports will be accepted. but cross-connections can be created. A blue icon indicates the destination is full.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 67 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: A white icon indicates that there are no cross-connections.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2. A green icon indicates that the source and destination are available and the destination can accept more E1 ports. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The limits granted by the license key have been exceeded. 3 · 2 · 67 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 Core-E Configuration Check to allow communication at data rate but in only one direction at a time.

and if tagged 802. The limits granted by the license key have been exceeded. Select Transport if ETH Port 4 on the Core-E Card is used to transport Ethernet data. For general traffic.1p user priority tag. Check to enable the optical SFP plug-in Select TMN if ETH Port 4 on the Core-E Card is used for SNMP data.1p or DiffServ in order to know which QOS function to chose. but cross-connections can be created. A message is also displayed stating that no more E1 ports will be accepted.4 Core-E Configuration [cont. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2. A green icon indicates that the source and destination are available and the destination can accept more E1 ports.1 Operation and Maintenence Note: A white icon indicates that there are no cross-connections. Each packet is based on DSCP field in IP header to determine priority. A blue icon indicates the destination is full. 3 · 2 · 68 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1p or DiffServ.2.] The Quality Of Service feature enables priority forwarding in the Core-E Card switch based on how the packets are tagged: not tagged or tagged 802. The user has to know if the packets are tagged.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 68 . the packets are not tagged and QOS can be disabled. Priority forwarding disabled. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Each packet is classified based on presence of valid 802.

Select Adaptive to sync TDM output to packets.5 E1 configuration Choose TDM2ETH if radio is being used to transport just Ethernet or Ethernet plus E1 data. Tx Over-the-hop ID Rx Over-the-hop ID. The user can select one of three modes: Adaptive. Differential. Must match Rx/Tx ID at other end. No two Flow IDs in a network can be the same. 3 · 2 · 69 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Select Unbalance 75 Ohm if tributary cable is coax. and TDM_Line_In.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 69 . Choose TDM2TDM if radio is being used to transport E1 data only (no Ethernet). Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The purpose of TMN Clock Source provisioning is to select the mode that will be used to sync TDM E1 data to the node Synchronization source. Flow ID is unique to network. Select Differential to sync TDM output to NE Synchronization source.2. Select Balance 120 Ohm if tributary cable is twisted pair.

Enter number from 1 to 100 for Transmitter ID. The user can select: • Static routing or • OSPF Area Check to enable radio ID mismatch function.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. No check mark here. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. Select Revertive feature if you want traffic on the protection channel to automatically switch back to the main channel when alarms clear or a switch command is released.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 70 . Enter number from 1 to 100 for Receiver ID.6 Radio Provisioning Radio Configuration Screen (without Adaptive Modulation) Check to enable PPP RF port. Must match associated Transmitter ID at other end of hop. Must match associated Receiver ID at other end of hop. Select the modulation scheme.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2. Select the suitable reference channel spacing. 3 · 2 · 70 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. No check mark here. Enter the Tx Power Check to enable ATPC. Select the modulation scheme 3 · 2 · 71 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.6 Radio Provisioning [cont. Enter the Tx RF frequency within the allowed range.] Select TX (Go) and RX (Return) separation frequency from drop-down list. Enter the ATPC parameters.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 71 .2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note 1: With the Adaptive Modulation the only available configuration is: 1+1 HSB. which will be used with 4 QAM modulation. Must match associated Receiver ID at other end of hop.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 72 .] Radio Configuration Screen (with Adaptive Modulation) Enable PPP RF port. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Must match associated Transmitter ID at other end of hop. Check mark to enable the Adaptive Modulation (see Note 1). 3 · 2 · 72 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2. The same power value will be used by the 16 QAM and 64 QAM modulation schemes.2. In this field the operator has to enter the constant power. Enter number from 1 to 100 for Transmitter ID. Note 2: The operator The operator can modify only the 4 QAM field. Enter the Tx Power (see Note 2). Select Revertive feature if you want traffic on the protection channel to automatically switch back to the main channel when alarms clear or a switch command is released. Enter number from 1 to 100 for Receiver ID. The user can select: • Static routing or • OSPF Area Check to enable radio ID mismatch function. The power range is shown on the right side and depends on the selected reference mode.6 Radio Provisioning [cont. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

] Check mark to enable the Adaptive Modulation.2 TCO suite – Provisioning tool 2. Enter the Tx RF frequency within the allowed range. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 6 dB below the 10-6 Rx threshold. Select in the Scheme field the Modulation range (4/16 QAM or 4/16/64 QAM) to be used by the Adaptive Modulation. Select TX (Go) and RX (Return) separation frequency from dropdown list.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 73 . Select in the Thresholds field how many dB the switching thresholds have to be moved from the default value (+4 dB/-2 dB). The default value is approx.2.6 Radio Provisioning [cont. 3 · 2 · 73 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Select in the Reference Mode field the spectral efficiency class to be set as reference. Select in the Reference Channel Spacing field the suitable channel spacing.

Master or Slave.2. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Any Available E1 Clock from E1 source via E1 peripheral.Local oscillator on Core-E Card.2 TCO suite –Provisioning 2. Synch-Out Port Configuration Connector that can be used to provide sync to another radio or ancillary equipment. Normal Master primary sync source. 3 · 2 · 74 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Non-Revertive .7 Synchronization Configuration Revertive . Free Run Local Oscillator .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © 2007.Does not switch back to primary source after primary alarm clears and stays on secondary sync source.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 74 . Synchronization Role. Synch-In Port SClock from external source received on the Sync In connector on the Core-E card.Switches sync source back to primary source after alarm on primary source clears.

The limits granted by the license key have been exceeded. Green ETH icons: A green icon indicates that the source and destination are available and the destination can accept more E1 ports. A message is also displayed stating that no more E1 ports will be accepted.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 75 . Check to make sure the card is enabled.8 Cross Connections Configuration Radio Access Card icon. Check to make sure the card is enabled. A white icon indicates the source/destination is unavailable.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 2 · 75 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Blue ETH icons: A blue icon indicates the destination is full. White ETH icons: A white icon indicates the source/destination is unavailable.

Enter any number between 2 and 4080. Indicates Flow ID has been created on the Radio Access Card Settings screen.] Black Line: E1 to Radio connection.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 76 . Flow ID is unique to network.2. 3 · 2 · 76 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Click on this line to display the popup window shown below.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. No two Flow IDs in a network can be the same. Flow ID number is required to transport E1 data.8 Cross Connections Configuration [cont. A Radio Access line must have a Flow ID to be cross-connected.

A green icon indicates that the source and destination are available and the destination can accept more E1 ports.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 77 . E1 Access Card icon.2. 3 · 2 · 77 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.8 Cross Connections Configuration [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2.] Black Line: E1 to Radio connection.

2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2. Click now for more details. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Rx Over-the-hop ID. Blue Line: E1 to Ethernet connection. Tx Over-the-hop ID.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Differential. 3 · 2 · 78 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Select Adaptive to sync TDM output to packets. Enter MAC address of link partner (External Ethernet Equipment). and TDM_Line_In. No two Flow IDs in a network can be the same.2.8 Cross Connections Configuration [cont.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 78 . Select Differential to sync TDM output to NE Synchronization source.] Flow ID is unique to network. The purpose of TMN Clock Source provisioning is to select the mode that will be used to sync TDM E1 data to the node Synchronization source. Select TDM_Line_In to sync TDM output to TDM input. The user can select one of three modes: Adaptive. Must match Rx/Tx ID at other end.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. No two Flow IDs in a network can be the same.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2. Indicates Flow ID has been created on the Radio Access Card Settings screen. Flow ID is unique to network. 3 · 2 · 79 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.8 Cross Connections Configuration [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. Flow ID number is required to transport E1 data.] Black Line: E1 to Radio connection.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 79 . Enter any number between2 and 4080. A Radio Access line must have a Flow ID to be cross-connected.

2.8 Cross Connections Configuration [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] Black Line: E1 to Radio connection.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2. 3 · 2 · 80 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 80 .

1D management When the NE is configured in this mode (default configuration).1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 2 · 81 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 81 . The packets having a VLAN ID already used for a TDM flow are accepted.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2. The packets from the user Ethernet ports having the VLAN ID out the allowed range (0 and 2-4080) are dropped.9 802. the Ethernet traffic is switched according to the destination MAC address without looking the VLAN.

2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 82 . All the user Ethernet ports (enabled and dis-abled) and all the radio ports are members of the VLAN 1. In egress VLAN-ID 1 is always removed from all the ports. VLAN 1 Management VLAN-ID 1 is automatically defined by the NE when the 802. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. but it can-not be neither changed nor deleted. the management of Ethernet traffic looking the VLAN is enabled. In this mode. VLAN-ID 1 is shown to the operator. 3 · 2 · 82 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.10 802.1Q bridge type is selected. one VLAN will be assigned to all Ethernet frames inside the MPR network.1Q management When the NE is configured in this mode.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1Q management [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. VLAN untagged ports in egress). Before applying this deletion.10 802.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. VLAN member ports.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2. the VLAN-ID=1 and PRI=0 are added to the untagged frames received on this port.2. It is possible to remove a VLAN-ID from the VLAN-ID table even if this VLAN-ID has been already configured on one or more user ports as Port VLAN to be added in ingress to untagged frames. a confirmation of the operation is shown to the operator. By clicking Next the Port VLan con-figuration screen opens 3 · 2 · 83 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. As consequence. ADD VLan: to create a new VLAN (refer to VLAN management figure) DEL VLan: to delete a VLAN-ID.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 83 .] EDIT VLan: to change the parameters of a VLAN (VLAN name.

This means that a disabled port can be configured as a member of a VLAN and a port already member of a VLAN can be disabled continuing to be a member of the same VLAN.: There is no check on unambiguity name. Both enabled and disabled user Ethernet ports (radio ports when declared are implicitly enabled) can be member of a VLAN. TDM2ETH) can-not be used. N.11 VLAN Management 3 · 2 · 84 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. By default. which means all the frames are trans-mitted with Tag. among the ports belonging to this VLAN (members). the packet is dropped.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2.B. Only the user Ethernet ports.4080) N. All the user Ethernet ports and all the Radio directions can be considered. [3] VLAN Ports field: Select the ports members of this VLAN by putting a check mark on the relevant check box. N.B.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 [1] VLAN ID field: Enter the VLAN ID (the configurable values must be in the range 2 . the untagged ports (in egress the VLAN will be removed from the frames). all the ports are members and the Untag flag is set to “False”. are manageable. for the VLAN IDs defined.: Tagged frames If one tagged packet with VLAN-ID X is received on a port which is not member of the VLAN-ID X.2. N. [2] VLAN Name field: Enter the VLAN Name: a text string of up to 32 characters.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 84 .B. The VLAN cannot be removed from the radio ports (with the exception of the VLAN 1). TDM2TDM. enabled and disabled. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.: The VLAN IDs already defined to cross-connect internal flows (i.: The VLAN-ID values allowed are in the range 2 . [4] Untagged Ports field: Select.B.4080. All Rights Reserved © 2007.e.

00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 85 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.The default Port VLANID and Priority values are: VLANID=1.12 Port VLAN Configuration Admit all frames (tagged and untagged frames are allowed in ingress) Admit tag frames only (only tagged frames are allowed in ingress) Port VLAN ID and Priority: if the Acceptable Frame Type is set to “Admit all frames” the VLAN-ID and Priority fields. PCP=0. All Rights Reserved © 2007. The Priority values allowed are in the range 0 .7.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2. the relevant port is removed as member of the VLAN 1. must be configured.1Q (Virtual Bridge) has been selected. to be added in ingress to untagged frames. Only VLAN-ID values already defined (in the VLAN management menu) can be configured for this purpose. 3 · 2 · 85 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: The Port VLan Configuration screen opens only if in the Bridge Configuration screen the 802.When the Port VLANID value is different from the default value.

3 · 2 · 86 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Select Static Routing for manual routing.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2. Select OSPF (Open Shortest Path First Protocol) for automatic routing.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 86 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Enter IP Address for radio.2.13 Network Configuration Enter local IP Address. Enable TMN VLAN feature on Core-E. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Displays the IP address of the Main NTP server entered as Main Server address on the NTP Server Configuration screen.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2.] Displays status (Enabled when checked) of NTP Protocol provisioning on NTP Server Configuration screen.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 2 · 87 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Displays the IP address of the Spare (standby) NTP server entered as Spare Server address on the NTP Server Configuration screen. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.13 Network Configuration [cont.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 87 .

00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 88 .14 Trusted Managers The default UDP Port is 5010. 3 · 2 · 88 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. then click on the IP Address column and write the IP address of the SNMP manager. but with a click on this column another port can be configured The Manager Type cannot be changed (it is fixed tp 5620 SAM) To activate a trusted manager click on Add Manager. To remove a manager select the manager from the list and clik on Remove Manager(s).2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 A Trusted manager is an SNMP manager to which the NE automatically sends the TRAPS generated inside the NE. The multiple selection of different managers can be done to remove more than one manager in one shot.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2. To confirm the selection click Enter.

00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 89 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Buttons: Prev: the procedure goes back to the previous step Save: allows to save the configuration file Apply: it is operative only if you are physically connected to the NE and it activates the download of the configuration to the NE Cancel: the procedure goes back to step 1 (Opening screen) All Rights Reserved © 2007.15 Typical Report Panel 3 · 2 · 89 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.2 TCO suite – Provisioning 2.

00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 90 .2.Exercise Configure completely the NEs of the training center by following the procedure given in this section. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 2 · 90 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Blank Page 3 · 2 · 91 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 91 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

End of Module Initial configuration 3 · 2 · 92 NE operation · Initial configuration 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 2 · Page 92 .2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

00 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 1 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 3 NE operation Module 3 Performance monitoring 3JK Edition 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2007-07-30 Author External consultant Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Blank Page 3·3·2 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 2 .

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 3 .Objectives Objectives: to be able to activate and evaluate the Performance Monitoring application. 3·3·3 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

2.Objectives [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] 3·3·4 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 4 .

4.4.1 Incoming (Current Data Table) 13. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Core-E unit performances 13.4.1 Introduction 13.3 Specific E1 Port # Incoming or Outgoing Exercise Exercise Blank Page End of Module Page 7 8 10 11 14 17 20 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 34 36 39 40 43 44 45 46 47 50 51 52 53 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 63 64 65 66 All Rights Reserved © 2007.9 Outgoing (History Data Table) 13.3.4.2 CD parameters 13.3 CD counters 13.14.4.13 How to change/delete a threshold table 13.5 HD counters 13.14.5 HD Counters All Rights 3 · 3 · 5 13.8 How to change/delete a threshold table 13.11 Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table 13.6 Outgoing (Current Data Table) Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NE operation · Performance monitoring 13.1 Ethernet Aggregate Rx Table 13.10 Adaptive Modulation performance 13.3.3.4.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.2 Specific E1 Port # association 13.11 Threshold tables 13.2.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Performance Monitoring Tool 13.3.4 Incoming (History Data Table) 13.4.3.4.1 One-Shot Threshold association 13.14.2 CD parameters 13.1 Current Data Table 13.4.12 Ethernet Aggregate Per Queue 13.3.10 HD Counters 13.8 CD counters 13.3 CD counters 13.3.14 Threshold table association 13.3.3.4.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 5 .6 Threshold tables 13.3.3 MD300 unit performances 13.4.4 History Data Table 13.4.7 How to create a new threshold table 13.12 How to create a new threshold table 13.2.4.3.1CD parameters 13.4.7 Operation and Maintenence 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.2 Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table 13.4.9 Threshold table association 13.4.3.4.

00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 6 .] Switch to notes view! Page 3·3·6 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Table of Contents [cont.2.

00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 7 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.1 Performance Monitoring Tool 3·3·7 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

13 Performance Monitoring Tool 13.1 Introduction To open the Performance Monitoring tool click on the relevant icon in the Menu bar as shown in the next figure.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 8 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The Performance Monitoring tool allows to display all the performances available on the units of MPR: Core-E unit MD300 unit P32E1DS1 unit 3·3·8 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 By clicking on a specific unit will appear the performances available with the selected unit.117).2.96.1 Introduction [cont. All Rights Reserved © 2007. In the example only one NE is present (151. In the left column will be present all the NEs.] The welcome screen of the Performance Monitoring screen is shown in Figure. 3·3·9 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.98.13 Performance Monitoring Tool 13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 9 . The Performance Monitoring tool can be used for different NEs.

00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 10 .2 Core-E unit performances Two groups of Performance Monitoring are available: Ethernet Aggregate Rx Table (incoming side) Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table (outgoing side) 3 · 3 · 10 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.13 Performance Monitoring Tool 13.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

The max. 4) Click on the Start button to start the monitoring. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2 Core-E unit performances 13.2. 60 seconds.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 11 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To activate the Rx performances (Incoming side): 1) Select the Ethernet Aggregate Rx Table row as shown in the next figure. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3) Select the Duration of the performance monitor in hour and minutes.1 Ethernet Aggregate Rx Table 3 · 3 · 11 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. 30. 2) Select the Interval (the collection time of the performances): 4. duration is 24 hours. 6.13. The default value is 4 sec.

This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.2. TRSEF: total number of errored frames. All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. TDF: total number of Ethernet frames which were chosen to be discarded due to buffer congestion. TRCF Multicast: total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The available performances at port level are: TRCO: total number of octects of Ethernet frames received by the Virtual Ethernet Interface.13. including Ethernet header characters.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 12 . This number does not include multicast packets.2 Core-E unit performances 13. The performances are displayed in two different formats: graphical format in the lower part tabular format in the upper part In the graphical format by putting a check mark on the check box only one (or more than one or all) performance can be displayed. TRCF Broadcast: total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. TRCF Unicast: total number of Ethernet Unicast frames received correctly by the Virtual Ethernet Interface. TRCF: total number of Ethernet frames received by the Virtual Ethernet Interface. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] To display the performance monitor select the suitable port (port #2 in the example). 3 · 3 · 12 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Ethernet Aggregate Rx Table [cont.

00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 13 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.13.2.] By selecting the Ethernet Aggregate Rx Table all the performances regarding all the enabled Ethernet ports are shown in tabular format. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. 3 · 3 · 13 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Ethernet Aggregate Rx Table [cont.2 Core-E unit performances 13.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To activate the Tx performances (Outgoing side): 1) Select the Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table row as shown in the next figure. duration is 24 hours. The default value is 4 sec.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 14 .13. 2) Select the Interval (the collection time of the performances): 4.2 Core-E unit performances 13.2. 3) Select the Duration of the performance monitor in hour and minutes. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 30.2. The max. All Rights Reserved © 2007. 60 seconds. 6.2 Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table 3 · 3 · 14 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. 4) Click on the Start button to start the monitoring.

including Ethernet header characters. TTF: total number of Ethernet frames transmitted out by the interface.2. TRCF Multicast: total number of good packets transmitted by this address that were directed to a multicast address.13.2. TRCF Broadcast: total number of good packets transmitted by this address that were directed to the broadcast address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address. The performances are displayed in two different formats: graphical format in the lower part tabular format in the upper part In the graphical format by putting a check mark on the check box only one (or more than one or all) performance can be displayed All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The available performances at port level are: TTO: total number of octets of Ethernet frames transmitted out by the Interface.2 Core-E unit performances 13. TDF: total number of Transmitted Ethernet frames which were chosen to be discarded due to buffer congestion.2 Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table [cont.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 15 . TRCF Unicast: total number of Ethernet Unicast frames transmitted out by the Virtual Ethernet Interface.] To display the performance monitor select the suitable port (port #2 in the example). 3 · 3 · 15 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

2.2 Core-E unit performances 13.2.13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 16 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 3 · 16 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] By selecting the Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table all the performances regarding all the enabled Ethernet ports are shown in tabular format.2 Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table [cont.

2.13 Performance Monitoring Tool 13. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3 MD300 unit performances By selecting the MD300 unit the screen in Figure opens.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 17 . 3 · 3 · 17 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

2..00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 18 . one current register is for 15 min report and one for 24 h report.) can be derived from the quality of the aggregate signal. therefore no dedicated quality of service Performance Monitoring is foreseen on the single tributaries.] The counters supported are the following: Errored Seconds Severely Errored Seconds Background Block Error Unavailable Seconds 3 · 3 · 18 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. The 24 h Performance Monitoring data are always stored in the History Data report. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Note: The 15 min Performance Monitoring data are stored in the History Data report only if errors have been occurred. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Considering one section. Two different radio sections can be monitored: Radio Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section..1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The performance monitoring (PM) gives indication on the quality of service. 96 history data can be stored for 15 min report and 8 history data for 24 h report.13 Performance Monitoring Tool 13. . Radio Link Section: the section identifying the protected section. Quality of service PM is performed in accordance with G.826 and G. It has assumed that the quality of the single tributary (E1.784. .3 MD300 unit performances [cont.

LINK refer to Performance Monitoring after the RPS switch. HOP refer to Performance Monitoring before the RPS switch.2.13 Performance Monitoring Tool 13.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] The performance reports can be of 2 different types: 15 minutes 24 hours The following description explains the functions to provide the Performance Monitoring process with a granularity period of 15 min. The Performance Monitoring are of HOP or LINK type. The same functions are provided for 24h Performance Monitoring process.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 19 .3 MD300 unit performances [cont. 3 · 3 · 19 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The current report can be seen (and configured) and the history log can be seen.

2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Refer to the figure.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 20 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To see (and configure) the Current Data report: 1) Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h) on the Current Data Table below the HOP channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only) to see the HOP report or below the LINK to see the LINK report.3 MD300 unit performances 13.3.1 Current Data Table 3 · 3 · 20 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 2) Click on the Start button in the Tool bar.13.

00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 21 .2.3 MD300 unit performances 13.3.13.] Refer to Figure to see an example of the Current Data display.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Current Data Table [cont. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 3 · 21 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

13. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3. if any.3 MD300 unit performances 13.] Refer to Figure to see the Alarm Data tab panel to see the alarms regarding the performances.1 Current Data Table [cont.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 22 . 3 · 3 · 22 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.

13. 3 · 3 · 23 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Elapsed Time field (read-only) displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring. By pressing the Refresh button this time changes.: number of intervals (reports) suppressed in the History because they don’t have errors. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Last Update: display time of the PM in the graphical description and in the tabular description in the upper part of the screen.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 23 . Interval supp. number of intervals (reports) which can be suppressed in the History because they don’t have errors. Suspect interval shows whether the current data are suspect or not (Note). Max Interval supp.3.3 MD300 unit performances 13.2 CD parameters The fields displayed in the upper part of the screen allow the operator to check and manage the parameter of the current data collection.: max.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Num.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: An interval is defined as “Suspect” if at least one of the following conditions occurs in the collection period: the elapsed time deviates more than 10 seconds of the nominal time loss of the PM data in the equipment performance counters have been reset during the interval.

3.3 MD300 unit performances 13.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: These values refer to the last refresh performed with the Auto Refresh. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3 CD counters BBE (Background Block Error) ES (Errored Second) SES (Severely Errored Second) UAS (Unavailable Second) 3 · 3 · 24 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 24 . All Rights Reserved © 2007.

4 History Data Table Refer to Figure to open the History Data Table.13. 3 · 3 · 25 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. The Performance Monitoring process monitors the parameters during a specified interval (i. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.e. Note: Use the arrows “Right” and “Left” in the lower part to pass from one log to another log in the history.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To see an History Data report: 1) Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h) on the History Data Table below the HOP channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only) to see the HOP report or click on LINK to see the LINK report. 15min) and stores their values in history data.3 MD300 unit performances 13. A History Data collection is created automatically at the end of each time interval of Current Data.3.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 25 .

13.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 26 .3.3 MD300 unit performances 13.5 HD counters BBE (Background Block Errors) ES (Errored Second) SES (Severely Errored Second) UAS (Unavailable Second) 3 · 3 · 26 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 27 .3 MD300 unit performances 13. There are two default threshold tables for LINK: Threshold #1 (to be associated to 15 min report) and Threshold #3 (to be associated to 24 h report). There are two default threshold tables for HOP: Threshold #1 (to be associated to 15 min report) and Threshold #4 (to be associated to 24 h report).3.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 3 · 27 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. There are threshold tables for the HOP and for the LINK. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. the operator must select the Thresholds Tables node tree.13.6 Threshold tables To view the available threshold for Performance Monitoring process.

Two threshold tables can be created for the LINK (Threshold #2 and #4). #5 and #6). 2) Write the values for the Low and High thresholds.13. To create a new threshold table: 1) Click on Threshold Tables HOP (or LINK) node tree.3. as shown in the next figure (Hop threshold). All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 MD300 unit performances 13. 3) Click on Create.2.7 How to create a new threshold table 3 · 3 · 28 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 28 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Automatically the new threshold takes a name with a progressive number. The Threshold Data Creation screen will appear.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: Four threshold tables can be created for the HOP (Threshold #2. #3.

2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: Only the created thresholds can be modified or deleted.13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 29 . 1) Click on the Threshold to be modified/deleted in Threshold node tree (Threshold #3 in the example of the figure).3 MD300 unit performances 13.8 How to change/delete a threshold table 1 2 3 3 · 3 · 29 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. 2) Low and high thresholds for each counter are shown. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The default thresholds can be only displayed. Edit the new values in the table fields to change them. 3) Click on the Apply button to confirm the changes or click on the Delete button to delete the threshold. All Rights Reserved © 2007.3.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To each Performance Monitoring can be associated a Threshold Table.13.3. To associate a Threshold Table click on Current Data Table or History Data Table of HOP-Channel#0 (or Channel#1) or of LINK.2. The 15min&24h tab panel will appear. In the Counter Thresholds field select the threshold to be associated and click on Apply. All Rights Reserved © 2007.9 Threshold table association 3 · 3 · 30 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3 MD300 unit performances 13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 30 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Refer to the next figure. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 31 . 2) Click on the Start button in the Tool bar.3 MD300 unit performances 13.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 If the Adaptive Modulation has been enabled in the Modem unit. To activate the Adaptive Modulation performance: 1) Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h) on the Current Data Table below the HOP channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only) to see the HOP report or below the LINK to see the LINK report.10 Adaptive Modulation performance 3 · 3 · 31 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3. in the Performance Monitoring tool will appear also the performances regarding the Adaptive Modulation: these performances show the time during which a specific modulation scheme has been active.13.2.

] Figure shows a display of Current Data report (15 min). All Rights Reserved © 2007.10 Adaptive Modulation performance [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Scale of the diagram can be changed by using the arrows (up and down) on the scale field and by pressing Update.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 32 .3. 3 · 3 · 32 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3 MD300 unit performances 13.13.

00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 33 .3 MD300 unit performances 13.10 Adaptive Modulation performance [cont.13. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: Use the arrows “Right” and “Left” in the lower part to pass from one log to another log in the history.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.3. 3 · 3 · 33 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.] Figure shows a display of History Data report (15 min).

3 MD300 unit performances 13. The max.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 34 . All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3) Select the Duration of the performance monitor in hour and minutes.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. duration is 24 hours. 2) Select the Interval (the collection time of the performances): 4.11 Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table 3 · 3 · 34 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.3. 4) Click on the Start button to start the monitoring.13.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To activate the Tx performances (Outgoing side): 1) Select the Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table row as shown in the next figure. 6. 30. The default value is 4 sec. 60 seconds.

TDF: total number of Transmitted Ethernet frames which were chosen to be discarded due to buffer congestion.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 35 .11 Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table [cont. including Ethernet header characters.] Refer to figure to see the performances. The performances are displayed in two different formats: graphical format in the lower part tabular format in the upper part In the graphical format by putting a check mark on the check box only one (or more than one or all) performance can be displayed. All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 MD300 unit performances 13.3. 3 · 3 · 35 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The available performances at output Tx radio port are: TTO: total number of octets of Ethernet frames transmitted out by the Interface.13. TTF: total number of Ethernet frames transmitted out by the interface.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

To activate the Ethernet Aggregate Per Queue performances (Outgoing radio side): 1) Select the Ethernet Aggregate Per Queue row as shown in the next figure. The max. 2) Select the Interval (the collection time of the performances): 4.13. Queue 8 is reserved to TDM2TDM traffic.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 36 . Queue 5 is the highest priority queue.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The MD300 unit has 8 output queues.3 MD300 unit performances 13. The remaining 5 queues are reserved to Ethernet traffic. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Queue 7 is reserved to TDM2Eth traffic. 60 seconds. duration is 24 hours.2.3. The default value is 4 sec. 6.12 Ethernet Aggregate Per Queue 3 · 3 · 36 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Queue 6 is reserved to TMN traffic. 3) Select the Duration of the performance monitor in hour and minutes. 4) Click on the Start button to start the monitoring. 30.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. TCO: total number of Ethernet conforming octects accepted and transmitted out by the specific queue of the interface.3 MD300 unit performances 13.13. 3 · 3 · 37 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 37 .3. The performances are displayed in two different formats: graphical format in the lower part tabular format in the upper part In the graphical format by putting a check mark on the check box only one (or more or all) performance can be displayed. Discard TCF: total number of Discarded Ethernet conforming frames accepted by the specific queue of the interface.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The available performances at queue level (for each queue) are: TCF: total number of Ethernet conforming frames accepted and transmitted out by the specific queue of the interface.] To display the performance monitor select the suitable queue (Queue #1 in the example).12 Ethernet Aggregate Per Queue [cont. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

3 · 3 · 38 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 38 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.12 Ethernet Aggregate Per Queue [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] By selecting the Ethernet Aggregate Per Queue row all the performances regarding all the queues are shown in tabular format.3.3 MD300 unit performances 13.2.

13 Performance Monitoring Tool 13. Two types of performances are available: Incoming: these performances are detected at the input in Tx side. The following description explains the functions to provide the Performance Monitoring process with a granularity period of 15 min.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances By selecting the P32E1DS1 unit the screen opens. configured as "Framed" are shown in bold. This means 4 counters (Incoming 15 Minutes.784. The CRC is used to detect the quality of the E1 stream. which have been configured as "Framed". The Quality is performed in accordance with G. for all the other E1 streams (in grey) the performance are not available because the relevant streams are disabled or they have been configured as "Unframed". All Rights Reserved © 2007. The 24 h Performance Monitoring data are always stored in the History Data report. Note: 9500MPR is transparent regarding the E1 stream. 96 history data can be stored for 15 min report and 8 history data for 24 h report. 3 · 3 · 39 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Outgoing: these performances are detected at the output in Rx side. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. it is never changed. Note: Stability measurement on Ethernet counters (with duration from few hours to 24 Hours) should be performed by selecting an high value (60 seconds) as collection time of the performances (refer to parameter Interval in Ethernet Aggregate Tx Table section).00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 39 . The same functions are provided for 24h Performance Monitoring process. Outgoing 15 Minutes and Outgoing 24 Hours) for 32 E1 streams. In Figure the E1 streams.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The performance monitoring (PM) gives indication on the quality of the E1 streams.2. Note: For a better quality in the Performance Monitoring it is recommended to start up to 128 E1 PM counters on the same NE. Note: The 15 min Performance Monitoring data are stored in the History Data report only if errors have been occurred. The performance reports are of 2 different types: 15 minutes 24 hours One current register is for 15 min report and one for 24 h report. Incoming 24 hours.826 and G.

4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13. Refer to the next figure.1 Incoming (Current Data Table) 3 · 3 · 40 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4.2. 2) Click on the Start button in the Tool bar.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To see (and configure) the Current Data report: 1) Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h) on the Current Data Table.13. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 40 . 3) Click on Refresh button to update the collection. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 41 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.13.4.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.1 Incoming (Current Data Table) [cont.] Example of the Current Data display 3 · 3 · 41 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 42 .4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.1 Incoming (Current Data Table) [cont. if any.13.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 3 · 3 · 42 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.] To see the Alarm Data tab panel to see the alarms regarding the performances.4.

2 CD parameters The fields displayed in the upper part of the screen allow the operator to check and manage the parameter of the current data collection.2.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13. Elapsed Time field (read-only) displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring. Suspect interval shows whether the current data are suspect or not (Note). 3 · 3 · 43 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: An interval is defined as “Suspect” if at least one of the following conditions occurs in the collection period: the elapsed time deviates more than 10 seconds of the nominal time loss of the Performance Monitoring data in the equipment performance counters have been reset during the interval.: max.13. Num.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 43 . Interval supp. number of intervals (reports) which can be suppressed in the History because they don’t have errors. All Rights Reserved © 2007. This time changes after the Auto Refresh.: number of intervals (reports) suppressed in the History because they don’t have errors. Max Interval supp. Last Update: display time of the Performance Monitoring in the graphical description and in the tabular description.4. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

3 CD counters BBE (Background Block Errors) ES (Errored Second) SES (Severely Errored Second) UAS (Unavailable Second) 3 · 3 · 44 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.4.2.13. All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: These values refer to the last refresh performed with the Refresh button in the Tool bar. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 44 .

A History Data collection is created automatically at the end of each time interval of Current Data. Note: Use the arrows “Right” and “Left” in the lower part to pass from one log to another log in the history. 15min) and stores their values in history data. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 45 .e.2. 3 · 3 · 45 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Performance Monitoring process monitors the parameters during a specified interval (i. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.13.4.4 Incoming (History Data Table) To see an History Data report: 1) Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h) on the History Data Table.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.

4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.2.13.5 HD Counters BBE (Background Block Errors) ES (Errored Second) SES (Severely Errored Second) UAS (Unavailable Second) 3 · 3 · 46 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 46 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 2) Click on the Start button in the Tool bar. All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.4. 3) Click on Refresh button to update the collection.6 Outgoing (Current Data Table) 3 · 3 · 47 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To see (and configure) the Current Data report: 1) Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h) on the Current Data Table.13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 47 .

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.6 Outgoing (Current Data Table) [cont.4.] Example of the Current Data display 3 · 3 · 48 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.2.13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 48 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

6 Outgoing (Current Data Table) [cont.4. if any. 3 · 3 · 49 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.] To see the Alarm Data tab panel to see the alarms regarding the performances. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.13.2.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 49 .

4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 50 .4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: An interval is defined as “Suspect” if at least one of the following conditions occurs in the collection period: the elapsed time deviates more than 10 seconds of the nominal time loss of the Performance Monitoring data in the equipment performance counters have been reset during the interval.: number of intervals (reports) suppressed in the History because they don’t have errors. Elapsed Time field (read-only) displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring. Last Update: display time of the Performance Monitoring in the graphical description and in the tabular description.2. Suspect interval shows whether the current data are suspect or not (Note). Num. Max Interval supp. Interval supp. This time changes after the Auto Refresh.: max. number of intervals (reports) which can be suppressed in the History because they don’t have errors. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 3 · 3 · 50 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.13.7 CD parameters The fields displayed in the upper part of the screen allow the operator to check and manage the parameter of the current data collection.

13.4.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: These values refer to the last refresh performed with the Refresh button in the Tool bar.2.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 51 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.8 CD counters BBE (Background Block Errors) ES (Errored Second) SES (Severely Errored Second) UAS (Unavailable Second) 3 · 3 · 51 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 52 . 3 · 3 · 52 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Performance Monitoring process monitors the parameters during a specified interval (i. All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13. A History Data collection is created automatically at the end of each time interval of Current Data.e. Note: Use the arrows “Right” and “Left” in the lower part to pass from one log to another log in the history.4.9 Outgoing (History Data Table) To see an History Data report: 1) Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h) on the History Data Table.2. 15min) and stores their values in history data. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.13.

4.10 HD Counters BBE (Background Block Errors) ES (Errored Second) SES (Severely Errored Second) UAS (Unavailable Second) 3 · 3 · 53 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.13.2.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 53 .

10 HD Counters [cont. Select the E1 Port #. Select the Interval type. All Rights Reserved © 2007.] 3 · 3 · 54 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Click on Start.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 54 . The One-Shot Start/Stop PM panel will appear.13.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: How to Start/Stop the perfomance monitoring for a selected E1 in one-shot.2.4.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13. Select the Signal type. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click on PDH.

11 Threshold tables This section describes how to display or change or create the threshold tables assigned to Performance Monitoring counters.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 55 .4. the operator must select the Thresholds Tables node tree.13. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13. There are two default threshold tables: Threshold #1 (to be associated to 15 min report) Threshold #4 (to be associated to 24 h report). To view the available threshold for Performance Monitoring process. 3 · 3 · 55 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.

4. The Threshold Data Creation screen will appear. To create a new threshold table: 1) Click on the Threshold Tables. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. #3 for 15 min report and #5 and #6 for 24 h report). All Rights Reserved © 2007. as shown in the figure (E1 threshold).12 How to create a new threshold table 3 · 3 · 56 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 56 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: Four threshold tables can be created (Threshold #2. 3) Click on Create.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13. Automatically the new threshold takes a name with a progressive number.2.13. 2) Write the values for the Low and High thresholds.

2) Low and high thresholds for each counter are shown.13 How to change/delete a threshold table 3 · 3 · 57 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.13. Edit the new values in the table fields to change them. 1) Click on the Threshold to be modified in Threshold node tree (Threshold #2 in the example of the figure).4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13. 3) Click on the Apply button to confirm the changes or click on the Delete button to delete the threshold. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 57 .4.2. The default thresholds can be only displayed.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: Only the created thresholds can be modified or deleted.

to Incoming. 3 · 3 · 58 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.4 P32E1DS1 unit performances 13. Outgoing or both.4. Incoming and Outgoing. 3) Specific E1 Port # Incoming or Outgoing: with this method a Threshold Table is applied only to a specific E1 stream.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 58 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.13.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 2) Specific E1 Port # association: with this method a Threshold Table is applied only to a specific E1 stream.2.14 Threshold table association To each Performance Monitoring can be associated a Threshold Table. Incoming or Outgoing. To associate a Threshold Table to an E1 stream three methods can be used: 1) One-Shot Threshold association (from E1 threshold): with this method the same Threshold Table is applied in one shot for the selected E1 streams.

00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 59 .4.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To associate a Threshold Table: 1) Click on E1 Threshold.13. The One-Shot Threshold Apply panel will appear.14 Threshold table association 13. 4) Click on Apply. 2) Select the E1 Port #.4.14.1 One-Shot Threshold association 3 · 3 · 59 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. 3) Select the the threshold to be associated to the 15min and/or 24h performance interval .

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007.4.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To associate a Threshold Table: 1) Click on the E1 Port #. The 15min&24h tab panel will appear.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 60 .2 Specific E1 Port # association 3 · 3 · 60 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. 2) In the Counter Thresholds field select the threshold to be associated and click on Apply.4.14 Threshold table association 13.14.13.

3 Specific E1 Port # Incoming or Outgoing Threshold association (Incoming) 3 · 3 · 61 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To associate a Threshold Table: 1) Click on the E1 Port #.2.13. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.4. The 15min&24h tab panel will appear. 2) In the Counter Thresholds field select the threshold to be associated and click on Apply. All Rights Reserved © 2007.14 Threshold table association 13.4.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 61 .14.

13.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.3 Specific E1 Port # Incoming or Outgoing [cont.] Threshold association (Outgoing) 3 · 3 · 62 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 62 .2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.14.4.4.14 Threshold table association 13.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Exercise Using the test link described in the following slide. simulate a link degradation and display the current and the historical collected data 3 · 3 · 63 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Using the variable attenuator. Enable Performance Monitoring on the NE A and B to monitor the quality of the path connecting the two Test Instruments 2. do the following steps: 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 63 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Exercise VARIABLE ATTENUATOR Test Instr.2. A B Test Instr. Operator 1 Operator 2 3 · 3 · 64 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 64 .

Blank Page 3 · 3 · 65 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 65 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.End of Module Performance monitoring 3 · 3 · 66 NE operation · Performance monitoring 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 3 · Module 3 · Page 66 .

Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 4 Maintenance Module 1 Fault management 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 1 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2007-07-30 Author External consultant Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 2 .Blank Page 4·1·2 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Objectives Objectives: to be able to perform the troubleshooting of the 9500 MPR.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 3 .2. 4·1·3 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.Objectives [cont.] 4·1·4 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 4 .1 Operation and Maintenence This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Fault Management 1.3.1.2.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 5 .1.1.1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Before Going to Site Checklist 1.3.4 Troubleshooting Configuration Problems 1.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems 1.1.3 Troubleshooting Path Problems 1.2 Troubleshooting Basics 1.2 Path Problems on a New Link 1.1.3 ODU removal and replacement End of Module Page 7 8 9 11 27 28 30 31 33 37 39 40 4·1·5 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 MSS Card removal and replacement 1.1 Path Problems on a Commissioned Link 1.1 Troubleshooting 1.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights This page is Reserved blank intentionally left © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Table of Contents [cont.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 6 .] Switch to notes view! 4·1·6 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Fault Management 4·1·7 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 7 .2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Troubleshooting This section provides guidance on: Before Going to Site Checklist Troubleshooting Basics Troubleshooting Path Problems Troubleshooting Configuration Problems Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems 4·1·8 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Fault Management 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 8 .

frequency band. do not take any action until the weather abates. temperature) be a factor in the reported fault? 4·1·9 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. before going to site obtain the following information: Does the fault require immediate attention? Determine who is the best-placed person to attend the fault. rather than in 9500 MPR? Are there alarms on other. All Rights Reserved © 2007. high/low end ODU.1 Before Going to Site Checklist Where possible.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note: If the fault suggests a rain fade or other weather related fade condition and it matches the prevailing weather conditions. modulation and configuration (nonprotected. its location.2. ice.1 Troubleshooting 1. capacity.1.1. or a number of links in the same geographical area? Is the path down completely or is traffic passing but with a BER alarm? Is only one or a number of tributaries affected? Could the fault be in the equipment connected to 9500 MPR. 9500 MPR type. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. protected. Confirm the nature and severity of the reported fault.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 9 . connected equipment? Is it a hard or intermittent fault? Do alarms confirm which end of an alarmed link is faulty? Could the weather (rain. high wind. diversity). Ask: Is just one 9500 MPR link affected.

such as a BER tester.1.] Does link history suggest any fault trends? Does the fault history for the link indicate a likely cause? Is the 9500 MPR link newly installed? Has there been any recent work done on the link? Ensure that you have with you: Appropriate spares. Any special test equipment that may be needed.1 Troubleshooting 1. If login security has been enabled. these should include replacement cards/plug-ins and ODU. (You need the 9500 MPR IP address and also the addresses for any remote sites to be accessed). and an Ethernet connection cable.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 10 .1 Before Going to Site Checklist [cont.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Toolkit. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. you need the 'engineer' password for the local and also any remote sites to be accessed. Key(s) for access to the site. A laptop PC loaded with Craft Terminal.1. If an ODU is suspected then local/national climbing safety requirements must be adhered to. Where an equipment failure is suspected. 4 · 1 · 10 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

1 Troubleshooting 1.2. 4 · 1 · 11 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. When logging into 9500 MPR with Craft Terminal. All Rights Reserved © 2007.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 11 . Where a Status LED on a plug-in is off (unlit). check the seating of the affected plugin. but power to the MSS is confirmed by LEDs on other plug-ins. Check Main Screen.1. the opening screen is the Main Screen. which can help narrow down the location and type of failure. Use the information provided to check for severity and problem type. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Refer to table Alarm Matrix for probable cause and recommended action.1. These provide summary alarm indications.2 Troubleshooting Basics Check front-panel LED indications.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This section provides general guidance on 9500 MPR troubleshooting.

00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 12 .1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Troubleshooting 1.1.] Table Alarm Matrix Equipment Core-E Card Alarm Description Card Fail Equipment Mismatch Card Missing Unconfigured Equipment LOS on ETH TMN Interface Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Major N/A 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Minor Minor Minor Minor Most Probable Cause Core-E card failed Card in slot does not match card configured in Core-E memory Core-E card is missing from slot Card in slot is not provisioned (enabled) Action Replace Core-E Card Install correct configured card Install Core-E Card in slot Provision card N/A N/A Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor No Ethernet input signal Check link partner and cable between link detected on ETH 4 on partner and ETH 4 Core-E Card connector PPP IP Fail Minor Minor Minor continue 4 · 1 · 12 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 13 .1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.] Alarm Description LOS on Gigabit ETH Interface Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Major 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Minor Minor Equipment Core-E Card Most Probable Cause Loss of Ethernet is detected on ETH 1-4 on Core-E Card Status of download Action Check link partner and cable between link partner and ETH 1-4 connector Wait for downloading to complete Check sync source and cable between sync source and Sync in port Firmware Download In Progress LOS on Sync Interface Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor No sync clk detected at Sync in port on Core-E Card Degraded Signal Minor on Sync Interface License Mismatch for Equipment Provisioned Major Minor Minor Sync clk errors detected Check sync source for at Sync in port on Core-E errors Card Wrong flash card Install correct flash installed on Core-E Card card for license Major Major continue 4 · 1 · 13 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Troubleshooting 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

1. upstream E1 source for errors indicating upstream failure continue 4 · 1 · 14 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Troubleshooting 1.] Alarm Description Card Fail Equipment Mismatch Card Missing Unconfigured Equipment LOS on PDH Tributary Degraded Signal Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Major Major Major Major Major Minor 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Minor Minor Minor Major Minor Minor Major Equipment E1 Access Card Most Probable Cause Action Replace E1 Access Card Minor Failure of E1 Access Card Minor Card in slot does not match Card Install correct configured in Core-E memory configured card Minor E1 Access Card is missing from slot Major Card is not Enabled on the Settings screen Minor No E1 input signal detected on any one or more of 32 lines Minor Errors on input signal detected on any one or more of 32 lines Install E1 Access Card in slot Enable card Check E1 source and/or cable Check E1 source AIS on PDH Major Tributary (RX) Check for Major AIS detected by the receive circuits on one or more E1 lines.1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 14 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.Replace alarmed E1 Access Card 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Verify sync provisioning at both ends of hop 2.1 Troubleshooting 1. Replace alarmed E1 Access Card 2. Could be caused by sync problem or E1 Access Card circuit failure 1.1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.Check/troubleshoot farend alarms 2.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 15 .1.] Alarm Description AIS on PDH Tributary (TX) Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Major 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Major Major Equipment E1 Access Card Most Probable Cause Action AIS detected on one or Check E1 source more E1 lines at input to PDH 32xE1 Access Card Packets are not being received by the emulation circuits Packet overflow causing buffer spill. Troubleshoot sync problem between local and farend Loss of Major CESoETH Frame Major Major Jitter Buffer Overrun Major Major Major continue 4 · 1 · 15 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

2.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 16 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Troubleshoot sync problem between local and farend Wait for downloading to complete Replace fan unit Install fan unit Firmware Download In Progress Fans Unit Card Fail Card Missing Unconfigured Equipment Minor Minor Minor Status of download Major Major Minor Minor Minor Fan failed Fan unit is missing from slot Unit is not Enabled on Enable fan unit the Settings screen continue 4 · 1 · 16 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Major 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Major Major Equipment E1 Access Card Alarm Description Jitter Buffer Underrun Most Probable Cause Buffer spill.1 Troubleshooting 1.1. Could be caused by sync problem or E1 Access Card circuit failure Action 1.Replace alarmed E1 Access Card 3.Verify sync provisioning at both ends of hop 2.1.

1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Troubleshooting 1.] Alarm Description Card Fail Equipment Mismatch Card Missing Unconfigured Equipment MSS-ODU Cable Loss Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Major Minor 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Minor Minor Minor Minor Equipment Radio Access Card Most Probable Cause Action Radio Access Card failed Replace radio Access Card Card in slot does not Install correct match card configured in configured card Core-E memory Radio Access Card is missing from slot Card is not Enabled on the Settings screen Bad cable connection at IF in/out connector on Radio Access Card Install Radio Access Card in slot Enable card Check/repair IF cable connection on alarmed Radio Access Card Major Minor Major Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor continue 4 · 1 · 17 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 17 .2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.

2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Replace alarmed Radio Access card Loss of Alignment N/A Minor Minor Delay between main and 1.Check/troubleshoot far-end alarms 3.1. 2. replace far-end off-line Radio Access Card.1 Troubleshooting 1.1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.Replace main ODU 4.Replace protect Radio Access Card 3. RF path problems.Switch far-end XMTRs (in a protected system). If alarm clears.Replace protect ODU continue 4 · 1 · 18 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 18 .] Alarm Description Loss of Radio Frame Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Minor 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Minor Minor Equipment Radio Access Card Most Probable Cause Far-end equipment problems. or local circuit failures have caused BER to increase to the point that frames are being lost Action 1.Replace main Radio protect RF paths Access Card detected 2.

00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 19 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Verify RSL is above Receiver threshold.1 Troubleshooting 1.2.] Alarm Description Demod Function Fail High BER Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Major Major 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Minor Minor Minor Minor Equipment Radio Access Card Most Probable Cause Internal receive circuit failure Bit Error Rate threshold (10E-4) exceeded on Receiver input circuits on modem Action Replace Radio Access Card 1.1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont. and no existing weather-related problems 2.1. antenna is aligned. If not – check upstream No action is required at this time.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Monitor receive signal for increased degrading Early Warning N/A Minor Minor 10E-9 BER detected continue 4 · 1 · 19 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.Verify RF path is clear.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. If alarm clears.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 20 .Replace alarmed Radio Access Card Link Identifier Mismatch Major Major Major Link identifier number Set numbers at both provisioned on Radio ends of hop to match Access Card settings screen is different from link identifier number provisioned at other end of hop continue 4 · 1 · 20 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.] Alarm Description ATPC Loop Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Minor 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Minor Minor Equipment Radio Access Card Most Probable Cause Loss of ATPC command path between far-end XMTR and local RCVR Action 1. replace far-end off-line Radio Access Card 2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1.Switch far-end XMTRs (in a protected system).2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.1 Troubleshooting 1.Check/troubleshoot far-end alarms 3.1.

1.1 Troubleshooting

1.1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.]
Alarm Description TCA on Radio Link Configuration/Alarm 1+0 N/A 1+1 HS 1+1 FD N/A Major

Equipment Radio Access Card

Most Probable Cause Alarm threshold exceeded on standby Radio Access Card

Action 1.Switch far-end XMTRs (in a protected system). If alarm clears, replace far-end off-line Radio Access Card

TCA on Radio Hop

Major

N/A

Minor

Alarm threshold exceeded on standby Radio Access Card after switching from main to standby 10 consecutive SES (unavailable time period) detected on main Radio Access Card 1.Switch farend XMTRs (in a protected system). If alarm clears, replace farend off-line Radio Access Card

UAT on Radio Link

N/A

N/A

Major

continue
4 · 1 · 21
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

TCA – Threshold Crossing Alarm UAT – Un-Available Time

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 21

1.1 Troubleshooting

1.1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.]
Alarm Description UAT on Radio Hop Configuration/Alarm 1+0 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Minor Major N/A

Equipment Radio Access Card

Most Probable Cause 10 consecutive SES (unavailable time period) detected on standby Radio Access Card after switching from admin to standby Download status

Action

Firmware Download In Progress LOS on Sync Interface

Minor

Minor

Minor

Wait for downloading to complete

Minor

Minor Minor

Minor Minor

Loss of sync clock detected 1.Replace Radio Access Card Bit errors have increased and have exceeded degraded signal threshold 1.Replace Radio Access Card

Degraded Signal Minor

License Mismatch for Equipment Provisioned

Major

Major

Major

Modem card type does not Replace Radio Access match card type stored in Card with correct memory on the Core-E Card card flash card

continue
4 · 1 · 22
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

TCA – Threshold Crossing Alarm UAT – Un-Available Time

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 22

1.1 Troubleshooting

1.1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.]
Alarm Description Card Fail Equipment Mismatch RCV Function Fail RF Frequency Mismatch Shifter Frequency Mismatch TX Power Mismatch Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Major Major 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Minor Minor Minor Minor

Equipment ODU

Most Probable Cause ODU failed

Action Replace ODU

ODU does not match Replace ODU ODU configured in CoreE memory ODU RCVR circuit failed Frequency out-of-range of configured TX frequency Configured shifter value not supported by ODU Configured TX power value not supported by ODU Replace ODU Re-configure frequency

Major Major

Minor Minor

Minor Minor

Major

Minor

Minor

Re-configure shifter value Re-configure TX power value

Minor

Minor

Minor

continue
4 · 1 · 23
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 23

1.1 Troubleshooting

1.1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.]
Alarm Description Software Mismatch ODU Not Responding Firmware Download In Progress Configuration/Alarm 1+0 Minor 1+1 HS 1+1 FD Minor Minor

Equipment ODU

Most Probable Cause

Action

Software version on ODU Download correct does not match software software version version on Core-E Loss of communication with ODU Download status 1.Replace ODU 2.Replace alarmed Radio Access Card Wait for downloading to complete

Minor

Minor

Minor

Minor

Minor

Minor

4 · 1 · 24
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 24

1.1 Troubleshooting

1.1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.]
Check the basics first.
For example, if multiple alarms are present, and these include power supply voltage or hardware alarms, always check their cause before looking at resultant downstream path failure or path warning (signal) alarms. Similarly, if a path-related failure is indicated (no hardware or software alarms), investigate the path. Go to the Craft Terminal History screen (15 minute view), to check supporting data, such as low RSL and incidence of intermittent pre-failure BER alarms, which if present are evidence of a path-related failure. Refer to Troubleshooting Path Problems for more information.

Check if symptoms match the alarm. Alarms reflect the alarm state, but in exceptional circumstances an alarm may be raised because of a failure to communicate correctly with the alarm source, or a failure in alarm management processing. Always check to see if symptoms match the alarm, using LED indications and the Craft Terminal.

4 · 1 · 25
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 25

1.1 Troubleshooting

1.1.2 Troubleshooting Basics [cont.]
Check if recent work may be a cause. Recent work at the site may be a cause or contributing factor. Check for a configuration change, software upgrade, power recycling (reboot), or other site work:
Many hardware alarms are only initiated as a loss-of-communications alarm during a reboot, software upgrade, or reconfiguration. By not being able to communicate with the Core-E, their settings cannot be loaded. The fault may be at the hardware device (most likely), communications to it, or the Core-E. Hardware/software compatibility alarms will be raised when a new plug-in is installed that needs a later version of 9500 MPR software. Hardware incompatible alarms will be raised when a plug-in is installed in a slot that has been configured for a different plug-in.

MSS before an ODU. If there is doubt about whether a fault is in the MSS or ODU, always replace the MSS first; it is quicker and easier. Hot-pluggable. MSS cards are hot-pluggable. There is no need to power-down before replacing, but traffic will be lost unless the plug-in is protected. Plug-in restoration time. Ensure adequate time is allowed for services to resume when a plug-in is replaced.

4 · 1 · 26
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 26

1.1 Troubleshooting

1.1.3 Troubleshooting Path Problems
A path-related problem, with the exception of interference, is characterized by traffic being similarly affected in both directions. Generally, if you are experiencing only a one-way problem, it is not a path problem.
Normally a path problem is signalled by a reduced RSL, and depending on its severity, a high BER. Only in worst case situations, such as an antenna knocked out of alignment, will a path fail completely, and stay that way. For weather-related problems, such as rain or ducting, the path problem will disappear as the weather returns to normal.

4 · 1 · 27
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Note: A path extends from ODU antenna port to ODU antenna port.

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 27

1.1.3 Troubleshooting Path Problems

1.1.3.1 Path Problems on a Commissioned Link
A path problem on an existing link, one that has been operating satisfactorily may be caused by:
Weather-related path degradation
If BER alarms are fleeting / not permanent and RSL returns to its normal, commissioned level after the alarm is cleared, rain, diffraction, or multipath fading is indicated. Rain fade is the likely cause of fade for links 13 GHz and higher. Diffraction and multipath/ducting for links 11 GHz and lower. If these alarms are persistent, there could be a problem with the link design or original installation.

Changed antenna alignment or antenna feed problem
If RSLs do not return to commissioned levels after a period of exceptionally strong winds, suspect antenna alignment. Also, check the antenna for physical damage, such as may occur with ice-fall. For a remote-mounted ODU, check its antenna feeder.

New path obstruction
Where all other parameters check as normal, and the path has potential for it to be obstructed by construction works, view/survey the path for possible new obstructions.

4 · 1 · 28
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 28

1.1.3 Troubleshooting Path Problems

1.1.3.1 Path Problems on a Commissioned Link [cont.]
Interference from other signal sources
Interference usually affects traffic in just one direction. Unlike other path problems, RSL is not affected. If suspected, check for new link installations at, or in the same geographical area, as the affected site. Ultimately, a spectrum analyzer may have to be used to confirm interference, which is not an easy task given the need to connect directly to the antenna port, after removing the ODU.

4 · 1 · 29
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 29

1.1.3 Troubleshooting Path Problems

1.1.3.2 Path Problems on a New Link
For a new link, potential problems can extend to also include:
Incorrect antenna alignment
One or both antennas incorrectly aligned. Refer to Installation alignment procedure.

Mismatching antenna polarizations
Given a typical polarization discrimination of 30 dB, for most links it is not possible to capture a signal to begin the antenna alignment process.

Incorrect path calculations
If the RSLs are too low or too high, antenna alignment is correct, and Tx power settings are correct, check the path calculations used to determine the link performance. A good calculation match is +/- 2 dB. Disagreements in excess of 3 dB should be investigated.

Reflections
Reflection (path cancellation) problems may not have been picked up at the path planning stage, particularly if the survey was a simple line-of-sight. If suspected, resurvey the path.

4 · 1 · 30
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 30

1.1 Troubleshooting

1.1.4 Troubleshooting Configuration Problems
Configuration problems should only occur during the set up of a new link, or reconfiguration of an existing link. The more common problems may be broadly categorized as:
Compatibility problems
The two alarms that may activate are Configuration Not Supported, and SW/HW Incompatible:
Configuration Not Supported: The plug-in installed is not enabled or is incorrect for the configuration. SW/HW Incompatible: Typically raised when new hardware is plugged into an existing MSS that has software from an earlier release. To remove the alarm, compatible 9500 MPR software is required; install the latest software.

Incorrect circuit connections
No alarms are activated for incorrect circuit connections. An incorrect assignment means the expected end-to-end circuit connectivity will not happen. Re-check circuit assignments for all nodes carrying the lost circuit(s) Take extra care when configuring ring circuits. Where the problem is not obvious, use the tributary loopback BER test to track a single circuit through a 9500 MPR network, beginning at the node closest to the node applying the BER test.

4 · 1 · 31
Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2.1 Operation and Maintenence

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 31

while ensuring an adequate fade margin.1.4 Troubleshooting Configuration Problems [cont. its effect may result in ine levels being too low (LOS alarm). Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. While no alarm activates for an incorrect setting.] Incorrect ID naming. or too high.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 32 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Incorrect/incompatible trib settings Trib line interface settings incorrect. ATPC settings Ensure ATPC settings are correct. or line levels incompatible.1. and commissioning All traffic-carrying circuits must have a unique flow ID for the cross-connect capability to operate. specifically that the target fade margin allows adequate headroom for local Tx power.1 Troubleshooting 1. 4 · 1 · 32 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. resulting in a high BER.

and connection Verify radio provisioning matches link partner Verify cabling between radio and link partner The LEDs on the Core-E Card front panel for each Ethernet connector are a good indicator of correct connectivity and activity on the Ethernet port.1.1. provisioning. All Rights Reserved © 2007. 4 · 1 · 33 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Troubleshooting 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 33 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2. Refer to table “Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems” on next slides for detail troubleshooting using the LEDs locally at the alarmed site.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems The most common Ethernet problems are network and connectivity related and therefore always check the following first: Verify link partner capability.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting problems related to the four Ethernet ports on the Core-E Card.

1.Cable between link partner and 2.] LED ETH IN LOS Indication Green LED Not Lit Probable Cause Corrective Action Loss of Ethernet RCV/radio XMT 1.1 Troubleshooting 1.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 34 .Check local Ethernet provisioning signal in. Connect/repair cable.Speed/Mode provisioning mismatch between link partner and radio continue 4 · 1 · 34 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. radio is disconnected/broken.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. 1. Most probable causes: screen.Check link partner provisioning. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1.2.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems [cont. 2.

waveguide/cabling No .Check farend Ethernet status.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Troubleshoot farend Ethernet status.Check path. No . Are any alarms indicated? Yes .Replace local radio Access Card.] LED ETH OUT LOS Indication Green LED Not Lit Probable Cause Loss of Ethernet XMT/radio RCV signal out.Replace local alarmed Core-E Card. 2. Is farend Tx Out ok? Yes . antenna.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 35 . Most probable causes: 1.Check/replace farend radio Access Card.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems [cont. Corrective Action 2. Check farend for Ethernet alarms.1.Loss of RF input to radio Access Card Check local RSL screen on CT. No 1.Check farend for Ethernet alarm.Troubleshoot farend alarms No .1. Is only abnormal status indicated? Yes . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Check farend Tx output. Is RSL ok? Yes .2.1 Troubleshooting 1.Loss of Ethernet input to radio Access Card 4 · 1 · 35 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Ethernet port must be enabled (provisioned Enabled on Core-E Settings Screen) 3 .Speed and mode (on Core-E Settings Screen) must be provisioned the same as the link partner. The yellow LED opposite the green on the connector indicates activity only. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1.1 Troubleshooting 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.] In order for the green Link LED to light: 1 .00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 36 .Cable must be connected to Ethernet port 2 .2.1. 4 · 1 · 36 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.5 Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems [cont. The flashing yellow LED is not an indicator of signal type or quality.

1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All plug-in cards can be removed and installed with power applied. plug-in connector.2. Improper alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane con-nector and/or damage to the plug-in connector. change or remove a card without first connecting to the shelf with an ESD grounding cable. All Rights Reserved © 2007. ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before applying sufficient pressure to bring the plug-in panel flush with the front panel. Pulling on the cables may damage the cable. 4 · 1 · 37 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2 MSS Card removal and replacement Never install.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 37 . Never withdraw or insert using attached cable(s). and/or plug-in card connector attachment. Failure to do so may cause ESD damage to the cards. When installing a plug-in.1 Fault Management 1. Plug-ins must be withdrawn and inserted using their finger-grip fastener/pulls.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.] All slots must be filled with either a peripheral plug-in card or a blank panel.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 38 . When removing or replacing a radio Access Card.2 MSS Card removal and replacement [cont. Failure to do so will compromise EMC integrity and cooling air from the fan. Failure to follow these cautions may cause arcing and/or possible power spikes that could affect traffic on other links installed at the node. withdraw the card from the shelf before disconnecting the cable to the ODU. The shelf battery voltage is present on the center conductor of the connector. Removing an in-service card in a protected link requires switching the traffic onto the standby (protection) channel.2. Removing an in-service card in an unprotected link will cause loss of traffic. 4 · 1 · 38 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Use extreme caution when connecting or disconnecting the ODU cable on the Radio Access Card.1 Fault Management 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Otherwise.3 ODU removal and replacement Get a spare unit with the same P/N. Disconnect the MSS-ODU cable.2.00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 39 . force with the CT the traffic onto the other channel.1 Fault Management 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note for 1+1 configurations: before replacing the ODU make sure that the traffic is transmitted over the other channel. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. 4 · 1 · 39 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Change the ODU. Check with the CT that there are no alarms. Reconnect the MSS-ODU cable. All Rights Reserved © 2007.

00 Section 4 · Module 1 · Page 40 .2.End of Module Fault management 4 · 1 · 40 Maintenance · Fault management 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 1 . Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 4 Maintenance Module 2 Software download 3JK Edition 1.00 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2007-07-30 Author External consultant Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © 2007.2.Blank Page 4·2·2 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 2 .

Objectives Objectives: to be able to download a new software version.2.00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 3 . 4·2·3 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

] 4·2·4 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Objectives [cont.00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 4 .1 Operation and Maintenence This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.

Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 5 .2.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Software download menu Server Access Configuration Init Software Download Software Status End of Module Page 7 8 9 10 12 4·2·5 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

] Switch to notes view! 4·2·6 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights This page is Reserved blank intentionally left © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.Table of Contents [cont.00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 6 .2.

00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 7 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.1 Software download menu 4·2·7 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.2.

Copy the SW file present in the software CD on the FTP server.1 Software download menu Server Access Configuration An FTP server can be used to speed up the software download to the NE. In the Address field write the IP address of the FTP server. By clicking on the Set Default button. the server access values will be filled in automatically with the default configuration. All Rights Reserved © 2007. The CT is the default FTP server with the following parameters: User Id: anonymous Password: Address: local host IP address. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 User Id and Password are the login information to access the FTP server. the System Default can be changed by writing different values in the fields and then by clicking on button OK.00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 8 . In the Port field write the port to be used and in the Root Directory field write the FTP server directory name from which the software can be downloaded. This menu allows to configure an FTP server on which the previously loaded software will be downloaded.2. Port: 21 Root Dir: / N.B. Server access configuration screen 4·2·8 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.

Recommended operation: Before starting the software download it is recommended to disable the ATPC operation (if it has been enabled) and to set in RTPC mode the max.1 Software download menu Init Software Download To start download select the desired software version and click on the Init download button. The Add button must be used to display another software file (extension DSC) in this screen to be then downloaded.00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 9 . When the Software Download starts a screen. Note: If the Forced download is not selected. Init Software Download screen 4·2·9 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.e. Download is aborted when the Abort button is pressed.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Using this menu. showing the in progress operation of the download. NOTE This screen displays the software packages previously stored. The Delete button must be used to delete a software file in this screen. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. Tx power. the system will compare the software to be downloaded with the software present in the NE and will proceed with the download operation only if the versions are different. the complete description file is downloaded to the NE). appears. software is downloaded to the NE in order to upgrade the NE software version.2. All Rights Reserved © 2007. The Forced check box can be used to force download (i.

2. One bank will be committed (active) and the other bank will be standby. To activate the new version first check the operational status of the standby bank. necessary to update the software version. NOTE The second bank appears when a new software package has been downloaded the first time. The 2 banks can store 2 different software versions. Software Status screen 4 · 2 · 10 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1. All Rights Reserved © 2007. By selecting Forced Activation the bank to be activated is forced to restart. If the status is enabled (this means that download took place without errors) select Activation or Forced Activation in the Software Management Action field and click on the Apply Action button. By selecting Activation the bank to be activated restarts only if the content of the two banks differ. which stores the NE software.1 Software download menu Software Status By clicking on the Software Unit Status button a software unit status screen opens (see on the next page) and gives additional information on the software package.00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 10 . During download. contains 2 banks.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This menu gives the information of the software installed in the NE. the download file is automatically stored in the standby bank. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1. The following information is displayed: Name: software name Version: software version Operational state: enabled or disabled Current status: committed or standby The committed status refers to the software currently in use The Flash Card.

2.] Software Units Details screen 4 · 2 · 11 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 11 . FCERE. FGUIN: FPGA firmware version MDPAR: firmware version of the FPGA involved in the MSS/ODU communication channel All Rights Reserved © 2007. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The following information is displayed on the screen: EC: software on the Equipment Controller OC_R: software on the ODU Controller (Radio) FDUFF.1 Software download menu Software Status [cont.

End of Module Software download 4 · 2 · 12 Maintenance · Software download 9500 MPR · 9500MPR R 1.00 Section 4 · Module 2 · Page 12 .1 Operation and Maintenence All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © 2007.2. Alcatel-Lucent 3JK Edition 1.

Page 1 .Last But One Page Switch to notes view! 1 @@PRODUCT @@COURSENAME All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR This page is left© blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR @@COURSENAME .

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR @@COURSENAME .All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR Passing on and copying of this document.Page 2 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful